245
Software version 02.00 CC1P7105en 29.11.2011 Building Technologies Division Infrastructure & Cities Sector LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation The LME7… and this Basic Documentation are intended for use by OEMs which integrate the burner controls in their products.

LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

  • Upload
    others

  • View
    11

  • Download
    0

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Page 1: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

Software version 02.00 CC1P7105en 29.11.2011

Building Technologies Division Infrastructure & Cities Sector

LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

The LME7… and this Basic Documentation are intended for use by OEMs which integrate the burner controls in their products.

Page 2: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

2/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7… CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector Safety notes 29.11.2011

Page 3: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

3/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7… CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector Safety notes 29.11.2011

Supplementary documentation User Documentation LME73.000.../PME73.840......................................................A7105 Environmental Product Declaration LME… .............................................................E7105 Environmental Product Declaration PME…..........................................................E7105.1 Data Sheet LME7…................................................................................................ N7105 Product Range Overview LME…............................................................................ Q7101

Page 4: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

4/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7… CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector Safety notes 29.11.2011

Page 5: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

5/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7… CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector Contents 29.11.2011

Contents

1 Safety notes...................................................................................................13

1.1 Warning notes ...............................................................................................13

1.2 Mounting notes ..............................................................................................15

1.3 Installation notes............................................................................................16

1.4 Electrical connection of flame detectors ........................................................17

1.5 Commissioning notes ....................................................................................18

1.6 Standards and certificates .............................................................................19

1.7 Lifetime ..........................................................................................................19

1.8 Disposal notes ...............................................................................................19

1.9 Typographical conventions............................................................................20

1.9.1 Safety notes...................................................................................................20

2 System makeup/function description.............................................................21

2.1 Features ........................................................................................................22

3 Type summary...............................................................................................23

3.1 Burner controls ..............................................................................................23

3.2 Program module ............................................................................................24

3.3 External display and operating units..............................................................26

3.4 Flame detectors.............................................................................................26

3.5 Actuators .......................................................................................................27

3.6 Pressure switch .............................................................................................27

3.7 Dummy plugs for RJ11 ..................................................................................28

3.8 Connector sets for LME7...............................................................................28

3.9 Service- tools.................................................................................................28

3.10 Test case and accessories ............................................................................29

4 Technical data ...............................................................................................30

4.1 Basic unit LME7.............................................................................................30

4.2 Terminal rating Inputs....................................................................................30

4.3 Terminal rating Outputs .................................................................................31

4.4 Cable lengths.................................................................................................32

4.5 Actuators .......................................................................................................32

4.6 Cross-sectional areas....................................................................................32

4.7 Signal cable AGV50... ...................................................................................33

4.7.1 AZL2... BCI ...............................................................................................33

4.8 Dummy plug for RJ11....................................................................................33

4.9 Environmental conditions ..............................................................................33

4.10 Flame supervision .........................................................................................34

4.10.1 Ionization probe .............................................................................................34

4.10.2 Flame detector QRA2.../QRA4.U/QRA10......................................................36

Page 6: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

6/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7… CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector Contents 29.11.2011

5 Dimensions....................................................................................................37

6 Function.........................................................................................................38

6.1 Preconditions for burner startup ....................................................................38

6.2 Undervoltage .................................................................................................38

6.3 Controlled intermittent operation ...................................................................38

6.4 Control sequence in the event of fault ...........................................................39

6.5 Resetting the burner control ..........................................................................39

6.6 Limitation of repetitions (can be parameterized) (depending on parameter 240) ..............................................................................................40

6.6.1 Parameter 240/240.00...................................................................................40

6.6.2 Parameter 240.01..........................................................................................40

7 Operation, indication, diagnostics..................................................................41

7.1 Operation.......................................................................................................41

7.2 Indication of operating state ..........................................................................41

7.3 Diagnostics of cause of fault..........................................................................42

8 Inputs/outputs ................................................................................................44

9 Basic unit .......................................................................................................45

9.1 Description of inputs and outputs ..................................................................45

9.2 Digital input....................................................................................................46

9.2.1 Safety Loop X3–04, terminal 1 and 2 ............................................................46

9.2.2 Input for external controller (ON/OFF) X5–03, terminal 1..............................46

9.2.3 Air pressure switch X3–02.............................................................................47

10 PME71.401....................................................................................................48

10.1 Program sequence PME71.401... .................................................................48

10.2 Connection diagrams for fuel train applications (examples)..........................50

10.2.1 Gas direct ignition (G), 1-stage......................................................................50

10.2.2 Gas direct ignition (G), 2-stage......................................................................50

10.3 Time table and settings for program sequence PME71.401... ......................51

10.4 LME71.000..: Inputs and outputs/internal connection diagram .....................52

10.5 Parameter list PME71.401... (AZL2...)...........................................................53

11 PME71.402....................................................................................................55

11.1 Program sequence PME71.402... .................................................................55

11.2 Connection diagrams for fuel train applications (examples)..........................57

11.2.1 Gas direct ignition (G), 1-stage......................................................................57

11.2.2 Gas pilot ignition 1 (Gp1/1), 1-stage..............................................................57

11.3 Time table and settings for program sequence PME71.402... ......................58

11.4 LME71.000..: Inputs and outputs/internal connection diagram .....................59

11.5 Parameter list PME71.402... (AZL2...)...........................................................60

Page 7: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

7/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7… CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector Contents 29.11.2011

12 PME71.901....................................................................................................63

12.1 Program sequence PME71.901... .................................................................63

12.2 Connection diagrams for fuel train applications (examples)..........................65

12.2.1 Gas direct ignition (G), 1-stage......................................................................65

12.2.2 Gas direct ignition (G), 1-stage and valve proving ........................................65

12.2.3 Gas valve proving..........................................................................................66 Valve proving with separate pressure switch ................................................66 Valve proving – calculation of leakage rate ...................................................67

12.3 Time table and settings for program sequence PME71.901... ......................68

12.4 LME71.000...: Inputs and outputs/internal connection diagram ....................69

12.5 Parameter list PME71.901... (AZL2...)...........................................................70

13 PME72.521....................................................................................................75

13.1 Program sequence PME72.521... .................................................................75

13.2 Connection diagrams for fuel train applications (examples)..........................77

13.2.1 Gas direct ignition (G), 1-stage......................................................................77

13.2.2 Gas direct ignition 1 (Gp1/1), 2-stage............................................................77

13.3 Connection diagram for LME72.000... with actuator SQM4... (example 1) ...................................................................................................................78

13.4 Connection diagram for LME72.000... without actuator SQM4... ..................79

13.5 Time table and settings for program sequence PME72.521... ......................80

13.6 LME72.000..: Inputs and outputs/internal connection diagram .....................81

13.7 Parameter list PME72.521... (AZL2...)...........................................................82

14 PME72.541....................................................................................................84

14.1 Program sequence PME72.541... .................................................................84

14.2 Connection diagrams for fuel train applications (examples)..........................86

14.2.1 Gas direct ignition (G), 1-stage......................................................................86

14.2.2 Gas pilot ignition 1 (Gp1/1), 1-stage..............................................................86

14.3 Connection diagram for LME72.000... with actuator SQM4... (example 1) ...................................................................................................................87

14.4 Connection diagram for LME72.000... without actuator SQM4... ..................88

14.5 Time table and settings for program sequence PME72.541... ......................89

14.6 LME72.000..: Inputs and outputs/internal connection diagram .....................90

14.7 Parameter list PME72.541... (AZL2...)...........................................................91

15 PME73.810....................................................................................................93

15.1 Program sequence PME73.810... .................................................................93

15.2 Connection diagrams for fuel train applications (examples)..........................95

15.2.1 Gas direct ignition (G), 1-stage......................................................................95

15.2.2 Gas direct ignition (G), 2-stage......................................................................95

15.2.3 Gas direct ignition (G), 1-stage, with valve proving .......................................96

15.2.4 Gas direct ignition (G), 2-stage, with valve proving .......................................96

15.2.5 Gas valve proving..........................................................................................97

Page 8: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

8/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7… CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector Contents 29.11.2011

Valve proving with separate pressure switch ................................................97 Valve proving – calculation of leakage rate ...................................................98

15.3 Connection diagram for LME73.000... with actuator SQM4... (example 1) ...................................................................................................................99

15.4 Time table and settings for program sequence PME73.810... ....................100

15.5 LME73.000...: Inputs and outputs/internal connection diagram ..................101

15.6 Parameter list PME73.810... (AZL2...).........................................................102

16 PME73.820..................................................................................................105

16.1 Program sequence PME73.820... ...............................................................105

16.2 Connection diagrams for fuel train applications (examples)........................107

16.2.1 Gas direct ignition (G), 1-stage....................................................................107

16.2.2 Gas direct ignition 1 (G), 2-stage.................................................................107

16.2.3 Gas direct ignition 1 (G), 1-stage, with valve proving ..................................108

16.2.4 Gas direct ignition (G), 2-stage, with valve proving .....................................108

16.2.5 Gas valve proving........................................................................................109 Valve proving with separate pressure switch ..............................................109 Valve proving – calculation of leakage rate .................................................110

16.3 Connection diagram for LME73.000... with actuator SQM4... (example 1) .................................................................................................................111

16.4 Connection diagram for LME73.000... without actuator SQM4... ................112

16.5 Time tables and settings for program sequence PME73.820......................113

16.6 LME73.000...: Inputs and outputs/internal connection diagram ..................114

16.7 Parameter list PME73.820... (AZL2...).........................................................115

17 PME73.830..................................................................................................118

17.1 Program sequence PME73.830... ...............................................................118

Connection diagrams for fuel train applications (examples) ........................................120

17.1.1 Gas direct ignition (G), 1-stage....................................................................120

17.1.2 Gas pilot ignition 1 (Gp1/1), 1-stage............................................................120

17.1.3 Gas pilot ignition 1 (Gp1/2), 1-stage, with valve proving .............................121

17.1.4 Gas direct ignition 1 (Gp1/2), 1-stage, with valve proving ...........................121

17.1.5 Gas valve proving........................................................................................122 Valve proving with separate pressure switch ..............................................122 Valve proving – calculation of leakage rate .................................................123

17.2 Connection diagram for LME73.000... with actuator SQM4... (example 1) .................................................................................................................124

17.3 Time table and settings for program sequence PME73.830... ....................125

17.4 LME73.000...: Inputs and outputs/internal connection diagram ..................126

17.5 Parameter list PME73.830... (AZL2...).........................................................127

18 PME73.831… ..............................................................................................130

18.1 Program sequence PME73.831…...............................................................130

18.2 Connection diagrams for fuel applications (examples)................................135

18.2.1 Gas direct ignition (G), 1-stage, without valve proving ................................135

Page 9: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

9/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7… CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector Contents 29.11.2011

18.2.2 Gas pilot ignition 2 (Gp2), 1-stage, without valve proving, simultaneously ignition burner .....................................................................135

18.2.3 Gas pilot ignition 1 (Gp1), 1-stage, with valve proving, alternate burning ignition burner.................................................................................136

18.2.4 Gas direct ignition 1 (G), 1-stage, with valve proving ..................................136

18.2.5 Valve proving of gas valves.........................................................................137 Valve proving with separate pressure switch ..............................................137 Valve proving – calculation of leakage rate .................................................138

18.3 Connection diagram for LME73.000... with actuator SQM4... (example 1) .................................................................................................................139

18.4 Connection diagram for LME73.000... with actuator SQM4... (example 2) .................................................................................................................140

18.5 Time table and settings for program sequence PME73.831... ....................141

18.6 LME73.000...: Inputs and outputs/internal connection diagram ..................143

18.7 Parameter list PME73.831... (AZL2...).........................................................144

19 PME73.840..................................................................................................148

19.1 Program sequence PME73.840... ...............................................................148

19.2 Connection diagrams for fuel train applications (examples)........................150

19.2.1 Gas direct ignition (G), 1-stage....................................................................150

19.2.2 Gas pilot ignition 1 (Gp1/1), 1-stage............................................................150

19.2.3 Gas pilot ignition 1 (Gp1/2), 1-stage, with valve proving .............................151

19.2.4 Gas direct ignition 1 (Gp1/2), 1-stage, with valve proving ...........................151

19.2.5 Gas valve proving........................................................................................152 Valve proving with separate pressure switch ..............................................152 Valve proving – calculation of leakage rate .................................................153

19.3 Connection diagram for LME73.000... with actuator SQM4... (example 1) .................................................................................................................154

19.4 Connection diagram for LME73.000... without actuator SQM4... ................155

19.5 Time table and settings for program sequence PME73.840... ....................156

19.6 LME73.000...: Inputs and outputs/internal connection diagram ..................157

19.7 Parameter list PME73.840... (AZL2...).........................................................158

20 Legend.........................................................................................................161

21 Multistage or modulating mode ...................................................................163

21.1 Relevant parameters ...................................................................................163

21.1.1 Connection diagram for feedback potentiometer ASZ12.33........................163

21.1.2 Connection diagram for load controller........................................................164

21.2 Actuators .....................................................................................................164

21.3 Function.......................................................................................................164

21.4 Load controller inputs ..................................................................................165

21.4.1 3-position step input X5-03..........................................................................165

21.4.2 Analog input X65 .........................................................................................165

21.4.3 Selection source preset output analog/3-position step input (P654) ...........165

Page 10: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

10/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7… CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector Contents 29.11.2011

21.4.4 Actuator output X2-09..................................................................................165

21.4.5 Setting the maximum running time of the actuator (P259/P260 timeout)........................................................................................................165

21.5 Multistage/modulating mode via 3-position step input X5-03 ......................166

21.5.1 Maximum possible resolution ......................................................................166

21.6 Modulating mode via analog input signal X65 .............................................166

21.6.1 Maximum possible resolution ......................................................................166

21.6.2 Standardization of modulation range...........................................................166

21.7 Setting the minimum power control step (dead band) (P123) in modulating mode via analog input signal X65 .............................................167

22 Safety notes relating to operation of AZL2... ...............................................168

23 Operation via AZL2…..................................................................................169

23.1 Description of the unit/display and buttons..................................................169

23.2 Meaning of symbols on the display .............................................................170

23.3 Special functions .........................................................................................170

23.3.1 Manual lockout ............................................................................................170

23.4 Operation.....................................................................................................171

23.4.1 Normal display.............................................................................................171

23.4.1.1. Display in standby mode .............................................................................171

23.4.1.2. Display during startup/shutdown .................................................................171 Display of program phases..........................................................................171 List of phase display (display depending on program) ................................172

23.4.1.3. Display of operating position .......................................................................173

23.4.1.4. Fault status messages, display of errors and info .......................................174 Display of errors (faults) with lockout...........................................................174 Reset 174

23.5 Menu-driven operation.................................................................................175

23.5.1 Assignment of levels....................................................................................175

23.6 Info level ......................................................................................................176

23.6.1 Display of info level......................................................................................177

23.6.2 Display of info values...................................................................................177

23.6.2.1. Identification date ........................................................................................177

23.6.2.2. Identification number ...................................................................................177

23.6.2.3. Identification of burner .................................................................................178

23.6.2.4. Number of startups resettable .....................................................................179

23.6.2.5. Total number of startups..............................................................................180

23.6.2.6. End of info level ...........................................................................................180

23.7 Service level ................................................................................................181

23.7.1 Display of the service level ..........................................................................181

23.7.2 Display of service values .............................................................................182

23.7.2.1. Error history .................................................................................................182

23.7.2.2. Mains voltage ..............................................................................................182

Page 11: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

11/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7… CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector Contents 29.11.2011

23.7.2.3. Intensity of flame .........................................................................................182

23.7.2.4. End of service level .....................................................................................182

23.8 Parameter level ...........................................................................................183

23.8.1 Entering the password.................................................................................184

23.8.2 Changing the heating engineer's password ................................................186

23.8.3 Changing the OEM's password ...................................................................187

23.8.4 Backup.........................................................................................................188

23.8.5 Restore ........................................................................................................190

23.9 Operating variants of the parameters ..........................................................192

23.9.1 Parameters without index, with direct display..............................................192

23.9.1.1. Example of parameter 225 (prepurge time) on the parameter level............192

23.9.2 Parameters without index, with no direct display.........................................194

23.9.2.1. Example of parameter 224 (specified time air pressure switch) on the parameter level............................................................................................194

23.9.3 Parameters with index, with or without direct display ..................................196

23.9.3.1. Example of parameter 701: Actual error on the service level......................196

24 Error code list with operation via external AZL2... display...........................199

25 Operation via internal LED ..........................................................................201

25.1 Description of display and buttons...............................................................201

25.2 Normal display.............................................................................................202

25.2.1 Display in standby mode .............................................................................202

25.2.2 Display during startup/shutdown .................................................................202

25.2.2.1. Display of program phases..........................................................................202

25.2.2.2. List of phase display ....................................................................................203

25.2.3 Display of operating position .......................................................................205

25.3 Special functions .........................................................................................205

25.3.1 Manual lockout ............................................................................................205

25.4 Fault status messages, display of errors .....................................................206

25.4.1 Display of errors (faults) with lockout...........................................................206

25.4.2 Display of flame current ION or QRA... .......................................................207

25.4.3 Reset ...........................................................................................................207

25.4.4 Display of flame current QRB... or QRC......................................................208

25.4.5 Display of preset output...............................................................................209

25.5 Manual adjustment (depending on program module)..................................210

25.5.1 Position of actuator or speed of PWM fan in modulating operation with analog signal ...............................................................................................210

25.6 First startup with a new program module or in case of replacement of program module ..........................................................................................213

25.7 Manual backup ............................................................................................215

25.7.1 Error during backup process .......................................................................216

25.8 Manual restore.............................................................................................217

25.8.1 Errors during the restore process ................................................................218

Page 12: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

12/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7… CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector Contents 29.11.2011

25.8.2 Reset ...........................................................................................................218

26 Error code list with operation via internal LED.............................................219

27 PWM settings ..............................................................................................221

27.1 Relevant parameters ...................................................................................221

27.2 PWM control parameters.............................................................................223

27.3 PWM safety parameters ..............................................................................224

27.4 Initial PWM parameter settings....................................................................225

27.4.1 Initial settings of PWM basic parameters ....................................................225 Prerequisites................................................................................................225 Operating steps ...........................................................................................225

27.4.2 Reading the value of parameter 920 in the prepurge phase (P30) and ignition load phase (P38, P40 and P44) ......................................................228 Procedure ....................................................................................................228

27.4.3 Final settings of PWM safety parameters....................................................229 Procedure ....................................................................................................229 Follow these steps.......................................................................................229 Checking prepurging ...................................................................................230 Checking the ignition load ...........................................................................230

27.4.4 Setting safety parameters 675.00/675.01 and checking the safety settings under worst-case conditions ..........................................................231 Procedure ....................................................................................................231 Follow these steps.......................................................................................231 Checking prepurging ...................................................................................231 Checking the ignition load ...........................................................................232

27.4.5 Matching the working points “Speeds for low-fire (P1), ignition load (P0) and high-fire (P2) for the heating engineer to the application..............232 Prerequisites................................................................................................232

27.4.6 ... via the onboard operating panel of the LME7... basic unit ......................233

27.4.7 ... via the AZL2... operating unit...................................................................234

27.5 Overview of PWM fan parameters (value range refers to PME71.901) .....236

28 List of figures ...............................................................................................242

Page 13: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

13/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 1 Safety notes 29.11.2011

1 Safety notes 1.1 Warning notes To avoid injury to persons, damage to property or the environment, the following warning notes must be observed! The LME7... are safety devices! Do not open, interfere with or modify the unit. Siemens does not assume responsibility for damage resulting from unauthorized interference! Additional safety notes contained in other chapters of this document must be observed as well! All activities (mounting, installation and service work, etc.) must be performed by

qualified personnel The burner or boiler manufacturer must ensure degree of protection IP40 for burner

controls as per DIN EN 60529 through proper installation of the LME7... If not observed, there will be a risk of electric shock

Before making any wiring changes in the connection area, completely isolate the plant from mains supply (all-polar disconnection). Ensure that the plant cannot be inadvertently switched on again and that it is indeed dead. If not observed, there is a risk of electric shock hazard

Ensure protection against electric shock hazard by providing adequate protection for the burner control’s connection terminals (e. g. with dummy plugs for inputs and outputs not used). If not observed, there is a risk of electric shock hazard

Ensure protection against electric shock at the LME7... and at all connected electrical components through proper installation. In terms of execution, stability and protection, covers must conform to EN 60730. If not observed, there will be a risk of electric shock

The space where the program module is located is defined as plugging space and therefore back-off-hand-proof when the program module is not fitted

Each time work has been carried out (mounting, installation, service work, etc.), check to ensure that wiring and parameterization is in an orderly state and make the safety checks as described in Commissioning notes. If not observed, there is a risk of impairment of safety functions and of electric shock hazard

If the housing or the area near the operating panel is damaged, the unit must immediately be put out of operation. If not observed, there is a risk of electric shock hazard

Press the buttons on the operating panel only manually without using any tools or pointed objects. If the film of the operating panel is damaged, there is a risk of electric shock hazard

The data line for the AZL2… or other accessories, such as the OCI410… (plugs into the BCI), must be connected or disconnected only when the burner control is dead (all-polar disconnection), since the BCI does not ensure safe separation from mains voltage. If not observed, there is a risk of electric shock hazard

If the BCI (jack RJ11) is not used, protection against electric shock hazard must be provided (jack must be covered up). If not observed, there is a risk of electric shock hazard

Fall or shock can adversely affect the safety functions. Such burner controls must not be put into operation, even if they do not exhibit any damage. If not observed, there is a risk of impairment of safety functions and of electric shock hazard

To ensure protection against electric shock hazard, make certain that, prior to switching on power, the signal cable AGV50... is correctly connected to the AZL2…

The mains-powered ionization probe is not protected against electric shock hazard. Protection against accidental contact must be ensured. If not observed, there is a risk of electric shock hazard

On the OEM level of the LME7…, it is possible to make parameter settings that differ from application standards. When setting the parameters, it must be made

Page 14: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

14/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 1 Safety notes 29.11.2011

certain that the application will run safely in compliance with legal requirements. If not observed, there is a risk that safety functions will be impaired

Only LME71.901... When the fan operates on permanent phase, it must be ensured that there is a safe electrical separation between mains voltage and PWM/Hall input/output. If not observed, there is a risk that safety functions will be impaired and that a risk of electric shock will exist

To ensure safety and reliability of the LME7... system, the following points must also be observed: - Condensation and ingress of humidity must be avoided.

Should such conditions occur, make sure that the unit will be completely dry before switching on again! If not observed, there will be a risk of electric shock

- Static charges must be avoided since they can damage the unit’s electronic components when touched. Recommendation: Use ESD equipment

Page 15: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

15/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 1 Safety notes 29.11.2011

1.2 Mounting notes Ensure that the relevant national safety regulations are complied with In the geographical areas where DIN regulations are in use, the requirements of

VDE must be satisfied, especially DIN/VDE 0100, 0550 and DIN/VDE 0722 The LME7... basic unit must be secured with fixing screws M4 (UNC32) or M5

(UNC24), observing a maximum tightening torque of 1.8 Nm and using all 3 fixing points. The additional mounting surfaces on the housing are provided to improve mechanical stability. These must fully rest on the mounting surface to which the unit is secured. The flatness of that mounting surface must be within a tolerance band of 0.3 mm

6

0

(42

)4

2

(73.9)

73.9

0.3

Outer contour housing

5

5

168.8

10

8.8

7113z05e/0810

Program moduleOperating panel

13

13

13

13

13

13

O5 (3x)

Figure 1: Mounting – mounting surface

Mounting surface

Installation notes

Page 16: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

16/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 1 Safety notes 29.11.2011

1.3 Installation notes Always run the high-voltage ignition cable separate from the unit and other cables

while observing the greatest possible distance Do not mix up live and neutral conductors Install switches, fuses and earthing in compliance with local regulations The connection diagrams show the burner controls with earthed neutral conductor.

In networks with nonearthed neutral conductor and ionization current supervision, terminal X10-05/1 must be connected to the earth conductor. It must be made certain that local regulations are complied with (e.g. protection against electric shock hazard) since AC 230 V (60 Hz) mains voltage produces peak leakage currents of 2.7 mA

Make certain that the maximum permissible current rating of the connection terminals is not exceeded

Make certain that strain relief of the connected cables is in compliance with the relevant standards

Do not feed external mains voltage to the control outputs of the unit. When testing the devices controlled by the burner control (fuel valves, etc.), the LME7… must not be connected to the units

Mains power must always be supplied via L and N. This means that no potential differential must exist between the neutral conductor N and protective earth PE

Make certain that strain relief of the connected cables is in compliance with the relevant standards (e.g. as per DIN EN 60730 and DIN EN 60335)

Ensure that spliced wires cannot get into contact with neighboring terminals. Use adequate ferrules. If this is not observed, there is a risk of loss of safety functions or a risk of electric shock

For protection, the burner manufacturer must fit dummy plugs to unused LME7... terminals

The connectors of the connecting cables for the LME7…, may only be removed or exchanged when the plant is shut down (all-polar disconnection), since the connections (escpecially BCI interface) does not provide safe separation from mains voltage

The mechanical coupling between the actuators and the controlling elements for fuel and air, or any other controlling elements, must be rigid

Signal cable AGV50... from LME7… to AZL2…or from LME7… to OCI410…: Since the BCI has no safe separation from mains voltage, the signal cable AGV50... between LME7… and AZL2…, or LME7… and OCI410…, must conform to certain specifications. Siemens has specified the signal cable AGV50... for use under the burner hood (cable supplied by Hütter; see Technical data). When using signal cables of other manufacture, Siemens’ requirement will not necessarily be met

Do not lay the signal cable AGV50... from the LME7… to the AZL2… together with other cables; use a separate cable

Service operation with a longer signal cable from LME7… to AZL2…, or from LME7… to OCI410…: If a longer signal cable is required for service work for example (short-time, <24 hours), note that above usage under the burner hood no longer applies and, for this reason, the signal cable can be subjected to increased mechanical stress. In that case, extra cable sheathing is required

Both the signal cable AGV50... and the AZL2… must be shipped and stored so that no damage due to dust and water can occur when used in the plant later on

The AZL2… must be used in a dry and clean environment Check the connecting lines of the air pressure switch for short-circuits

Warning! Only LME71.901... When the fan operates on permanent phase, it must be ensured that there is a safe electrical separation between mains voltage and PWM/Hall input/output. If not observed, there is a risk that safety functions will be impaired and that a risk of electric shock will exist!

Page 17: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

17/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 1 Safety notes 29.11.2011

1.4 Electrical connection of flame detectors It is important to achieve practically disturbance- and loss-free signal transmission: Never run the detector cable together with other cables

– Line capacitance reduces the magnitude of the flame signal – Use a separate cable

Observe the permissible detector cable lengths (see Technical Data) The mains-powered ionization probe is not protected against electric shock hazard.

Protection against accidental contact must be ensured Locate the ignition electrode and the ionization probe such that the ignition spark

cannot arc over to the ionization probe (risk of electrical overloads) and that it cannot adversely affect the supervision of ionization Insulation resistance

– Must be a minimum of 50 M between ionization probe and ground – Soiled detector holders reduce the insulation resistance, thus supporting creepage currents

Earth the burner in compliance with the relevant regulations; earthing the boiler alone does not suffice

Page 18: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

18/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 1 Safety notes 29.11.2011

1.5 Commissioning notes Prior to commissioning the system, the following points must be checked: Correct assignment of the valves to the valve outputs at the LME7... Correct setting of the time parameters, especially the safety and prepurge times Correct functioning of the flame detector in the event of loss of flame during

operation (including the response time), with extraneous light, during the prepurge time and, when there is no establishment of flame, at the end of the ignition safety time

During commissioning, check all safety functions There is no absolute protection against incorrect use of the RASTx connectors.

For this reason, prior to commissioning the plant, check the correct assignment of all connectors

Electromagnetic emissions must be checked on an application-specific basis

For display of the flame on the AZL2…, following general conditions apply: - Display is subject to various component tolerances so that deviations of 10% can occur - Note that for physical reasons there is no linear relationship between flame display and detector signal values

The functions of the following available or required input state signals must be checked: Air pressure Minimum gas pressure and maximum gas pressure or POC Safety loop (e.g. safety limit thermostat)

Duties of the expert when making the approval tests

Action Check/response

a) Burner startup with flame detector disconnected Lockout at the end of 1st safety time

b) Burner startup with flame detector exposed to extraneous light, e.g. to incandescent light with detectors for visible radiation, quartz-halogen bulb or cigarette lighter flame with detectors for UV radiation

Lockout during prepurge time

c) Simulation of loss of flame during operation. For that, disconnect the flame detector in the operating position and maintain that state

Lockout or restart, depending on the burner control’s configuration

d) Check the plant’s response time with loss of flame during operation. For that purpose, manually disconnect the fuel valves from power and check the time from this moment the burner control requires to turn off power to the valve

Turning off power to the fuel valves by the burner control within the period of time permitted for the respective time of plant

Further checks may be required, depending on the field of use and the relevant standards. After installation and commissioning, the parameterized values and settings must be documented by the person/heating engineer responsible for the plant. These data can be printed out with the help of the ACS410 PC software, for example, or must be written down. The documentation must be checked by the expert and then kept in a safe place.

Warning! On the OEM access level of the LME7…, it is possible to make parameter settings that differ from application standards. When setting the parameters, it must be made certain that the application will run safely in accordance with legal requirements. If not observed, there is a risk that safety functions will be impaired.

Page 19: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

19/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 1 Safety notes 29.11.2011

1.6 Standards and certificates

Conformity to EEC directives - Electromagnetic compatibility EMC (immunity) - Directives for gas-fired appliances - Low-voltage directive

2004/108/EC 2009/142/EC 2006/95/EC

ISO 9001: 2010

Cert. 00739

ISO 14001: 2010

Cert. 38233

Only for AC 120 V versions

Identification code to EN 298 chapter 4 PME71.401..: F M C L J N PME71.402...:F B C L J N PME71.901...: F M C L J N PME72.521..: F M L L X N PME72.541..: F B L L X N PME73.810..: F M C L J N PME73.820..: F M C L J N PME73.830..: F B C L J N PME73.831..: F B L L J N PME73.840..: F B C L J N

1.7 Lifetime Burner controls LME7… have a designed lifetime* of 250,000 burner startup cycles which, under normal operating conditions in heating mode, correspond to approx. 10 years of usage (starting from the production date given on the type field). This lifetime is based on the endurance tests specified in standard EN 230/EN 298 and the table containing the relevant test documentation as published by the European Association of Component Manufacturers (Afecor) (www.afecor.org). The designed lifetime is based on use of the burner controls according to the manufacturer’s Data Sheet and Basic Documentation. After reaching the designed lifetime in terms of the number of burner startup cycles, or the respective time of usage, the burner control is to be replaced by authorized personnel. * The designed lifetime is not the warranty time specified in the Terms of Delivery

1.8 Disposal notes The unit contains electrical and electronic components and must not be disposed of together with domestic waste. Local and currently valid legislation must be observed.

Page 20: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

20/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 0 29.11.2011

1.9 Typographical conventions

1.9.1 Safety notes This Basic Documentation contains instructions which must be observed to ensure your own personal safety and to prevent damage to equipment and property. The instructions and notes are highlighted by warning triangles, arrows or a hand symbol and are presented as follows, depending on the hazard level:

Danger means that death, severe personal injury or substantial

property damage will occur if adequate precautionary measures are not taken.

Warning means that death, severe personal injury or substantial

property damage can occur if adequate precautionary measures are not taken.

Caution means that minor personal injury or property damage

can occur if adequate precautionary measures are not taken.

Note draws your attention to important information on the product, on product handling, or to a special part of the documentation.

Reference refers to further information given in other pieces of

user documentation, chapters or sections.

Only qualified personnel are allowed to install and operate the equipment. Qualified personnel in the context of the safety-related notes contained in this document are persons who are authorized to commission, ground and tag devices, systems and electrical circuits in compliance with established safety practices and standards. Note the following: The device may only be used on the applications described in the technical documentation and only in connection with devices or components from other suppliers that have been approved or recommended by Siemens. The product can only function correctly and safely if shipped, stored, set up and installed correctly, and operated and maintained as specified.

Qualified personnel

Correct use

Page 21: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

21/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 2 System makeup/function description 29.11.2011

2 System makeup/function description The LME7... is a microprocessor-based burner control with matching system components for the control and supervision of forced draft burners of medium to high capacity. LME7… are used for the startup and supervision of 1- or 2-stage forced draft burners in intermittent operation. The flame is supervised with an ionization probe, optionally with flame detector QRA2..., QRA4.U or QRA10....

- Gas burner controls to EN 298 : 2003 - Oil burner controls to EN 230 : 2005 - For forced draft gas burners to EN 676 - For forced draft oil burners to EN 267 Integrated in the LME7... basic unit are: Burner control BCI for connection a display or PC Only LME72.../LME73...: Control for one actuator Lockout reset button (info button) 3 multicolor signal lamp LED for operations and fault notifications Optional: Analog inputs for load controller DC 0...10 V, DC 0/4...20 mA, 0...135 Ω 3 x 7-segment display for service, fault and operating state information Interface for program module

Figure 2: Example: Modulating gas burner

Page 22: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

22/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 2 System makeup/function description 29.11.2011

The LME7... system components (display and operating unit AZL2...) are connected directly via BCI to the LME7... basic unit. All safety-related digital inputs and outputs of the system are monitored by a contact feedback network. For intermittent operation in connection with the LME7..., the ionization probe and, optionally, the flame detector QRA2..., QRA4.U or QRA10... can be used. The burner control is operated and parameterized via the AZL2... display and operating unit or via PC tool. The AZL2... display and operating unit features an LCD and menu-driven operation, offering straightforward operation and targeted diagnostics. When making diagnostics, the display shows the operating states, the type of error and meter readings. Passwords protect the different parameter levels of the burner/boiler manufacturer and heating engineer against unauthorized access. Basic settings that the plant operator can make on site require no password. Multicolor indication for operating state and fault status messages via 3-color LED Diagnostics of cause of fault via blink code Extensive service, fault and operating state information via built-in 3 x 7 segment

display Extensive service, fault and operating state information via BCI and AZL2...

2.1 Features - Undervoltage detection - Electrical remote reset facility - Accurate control times thanks to digital signal handling - Multicolor indication of fault status and operating state messages - Air pressure supervision with function check of air pressure switch during start and

operation (gas) - Repetition limitation - Controlled intermittent operation after 24 hours of continuous operation (can be

parameterized via parameter P239) depending on program module PME... - BCI - Indication of program sequence - Connection for program module PME... - Unit parameter adjustable either via display or PC software ACS410

Indication and diagnostics

Page 23: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

23/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 3 Type summary 29.11.2011

3 Type summary 3.1 Burner controls Microprocessor-based burner control for single-/dual-fuel burner of medium to large capacity, one actuator.

Type

LM

E71

.000

A1

LM

E71

.000

A2

LM

E72

.000

A2

LM

E73

.000

A1

LM

E73

.000

A2

Mains voltage AC 120 V --- --- ---

Mains voltage AC 230 V --- ---

Gas pressure switch-min/POC

Pressure switch valve proving

Air pressure switch

Ionization probe

QRA2.../QRA4.U/QRA10...

Load controller analog input signal (0...10 V, 4...20 mA, 0...135 ) ---

Load controller input 3-position step input/2-stage

Output actuator control --- ---

Input feedback for actuator with potentiometer 0...1 k --- --- ---

Output PWM control

Onboard LED 7-segment display ---

BCI bus for AZL2...

Page 24: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

24/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 3 Type summary 29.11.2011

3.2 Program module Example:

Typenbezeichnung

PM

E71

.401

A1

PM

E71

.402

A1

PM

E71

.901

A1

PM

E73

.810

A1

PM

E73

.820

A1

PM

E73

.830

A1

PM

E73

.831

A1

PM

E73

.840

A1

Mains voltage AC 120 V

For use with LME71.000A... --- --- --- --- ---

For use with LME72.000A... --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

For use with LME73.000A... --- --- ---

Gas program forced draft burner

Gas program atmospheric burner --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

1-stage/2-stage or 1-stage modulating

Pilot burner simultaneously/alternately --- --- --- ---

Modulating via actuator (pneumatic or mechanic gas-air ratio control)

--- --- ---

Modulating via PWM fan (pneumatic or mechanic gas-air ratio control)

--- --- --- --- --- --- ---

Fan speed control/control via analog signal/3-position step signal

--- --- --- --- --- --- ---

Actuator control via analog signal/3-position step signal for actuator with potentiometer

--- --- --- --- ---

3-position signal for actuator without potentiometer --- --- --- --- ---

Control sequence programmable time

POC ---

Valve proving --- ---

Input valve proving ON/Off --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

Page 25: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

25/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 3 Type summary 29.11.2011

Typenbezeichnung

PM

E71

.401

A2

PM

E71

.402

A2

PM

E71

.901

A2

PM

E72

.521

A2

PM

E72

.541

A2

PM

E73

.810

A2

PM

E73

.820

A2

PM

E73

.830

A2

PM

E73

.831

A2

PM

E73

.840

A2

Mains voltage AC 230 V

For use with LME71.000A... --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

For use with LME72.000A... --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

For use with LME73.000A... --- --- --- --- ---

Gas program forced draft burner

Gas program atmospheric burner --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

1-stage/2-stage or 1-stage modulating

Pilot burner simultaneously/alternately --- --- --- --- ---

Modulating via actuator (pneumatic or mechanic gas-air ratio control)

--- --- ---

Modulating via PWM fan (pneumatic or mechanic gas-air ratio control)

--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

Fan speed control/control via analog signal/3-position step signal

--- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

Actuator control via analog signal/3-position step signal for actuator with potentiometer

--- --- --- --- --- --- ---

3-position signal for actuator without potentiometer --- --- --- --- ---

Control sequence programmable time --- ---

POC ---

Valve proving --- --- --- ---

Input valve proving ON/Off --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

Example:

Page 26: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

26/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 3 Type summary 29.11.2011

3.3 External display and operating units AZL21.00A9 Display and operating unit, detached, choice of mounting methods, 8-digit LCD, 5 buttons, BCI for LME7..., degree of protection IP40. See Data Sheet N7542

AZL23.00A9 Display and operating unit, detached, choice of mounting methods, 8-digit LCD, 5 buttons, BCI for LME7..., degree of protection IP54. See Data Sheet N7542

Built-in in the LME7... 3-colored LED, reset button, 3 other buttons for operation in connection with 3 x 7-segment display

AGV50.100 Signal cable for AZL2..., with RJ11 connector, cable length 1 m, pack of 10

3.4 Flame detectors QRA2… Flame detector for use with Siemens burner controls, for the supervision of gas flames, yellow-/blue-burning oil flames and for ignition spark proving. Plastic insulated housing, metalized to prevent static charging caused by the air flow from the fan. For direct mounting on the burner. Delivery optional with/without flange and clamp. See Data Sheet N7712

QRA4.U Flame detector for use with Siemens burner controls, for the supervision of gas flames, yellow-/blue-burning oil flames and for ignition spark proving. See Data Sheet N7711

QRA10… Flame detector for use with Siemens burner controls, for supervision of gas flames, yellow-/blue-burning oil flames and for ignition spark proving. Die-cast aluminium housing with a 1 in. mounting coupling and connection facility for cooling air. The housing of this detector has a bayonet fitting which allows it to be secured either directly to the 1 in. mounting coupling or to the AGG06. The 1 in. mounting coupling can be screwed to a viewing tube or to the AGG07. The Pg cable gland can be removed and replaced, if some other detector cable shall be used. See Data Sheet N7712

Page 27: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

27/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 3 Type summary 29.11.2011

3.5 Actuators SQN3… Electromotoric actuators for air dampers and control valves of oil and gas burners of small to medium capacity. Holding torque:/running time 0,8 Nm/4,5 s

until 3 Nm/30 s

See Data Sheet N7808 SQN7… Electromotoric actuators for air dampers and control valves of oil and gas burners of small to medium capacity. Holding torque:/running time 0,7 Nm/4 s

until 2,5 Nm/30 s

See Data Sheet N7804 SQM40…/SQM41... The actuators are suited for driving flow control valves, butterfly valves, dampers or for use on other applications that require rotary motion. Areas of application are oil and gas burners of medium to larger capacity as well as thermal process plants.

Holding torque: Up to 10 Nm Running times: 15 s and 30 s

Direction of rotation: - clockwise or counterclockwise rotation

SQM5... Electromotoric actuators for air dampers and control valves of oil and gas burners of small to medium capacity, with UL-registered. Holding torque:/running time

10 Nm/15 s until 40 Nm/60 s

See Data Sheet N7815

3.6 Pressure switch

QPLx5… The pressure switch is used for monitoring of gas or air pressure. See Data Sheet N7221

Page 28: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

28/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 3 Type summary 29.11.2011

3.7 Dummy plugs for RJ11 Dummy plug For 6-pole modular connector (RJ11) Supplier recommendation: Molex, order no.: 085 999 3256

3.8 Connector sets for LME7... AGG3.710 Connector set complete for LME7… RAST5 and RAST3.5 Single packs AGG3.720 10 standard connector sets complete for LME7… RAST5 and RAST3.5 Single packs The several connectors are delivered into bags to 10 pieces each as a unit. AGG3.730 50 standard connector sets complete for LME7… RAST5 and RAST3.5 Single packs The several connectors are delivered into bags to 50 pieces each as a unit.

Example: X5-03

3.9 Service- tools

OCI410… Interface between burner control and PC Facilitates viewing, handling and recording setting parameters on site in connection with the ACS410 software See Data Sheet N7615

ACS410 PC software for setting the parameters and for visualizing the burner controls See Software Documentation J7352

Page 29: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

29/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 3 Type summary 29.11.2011

3.10 Test case and accessories KF8895.1A9 Test case for LME... For simulations of burner functions as startups,

sequence of operations in connection with the specified burner controls

For check and test purposes of burner controls For operation in laboratories by expert qualified

personnel See User Manual CC1U7993

AGV8895.01 Connection cable set for LME7… For test case KF8895.1A9 Consisting of:

AGV8895.01X1 Connection cable for mains potential For test case KF8895.1A9

AGV8895.01X3 Connection cable for extra-low voltage, PELV For test case KF8895.1A9

Page 30: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

30/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 4 Technical data 29.11.2011

4 Technical data 4.1 Basic unit LME7...

Mains voltage AC 120 V AC 230 V Mains frequency 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz External primary fuse Max. 6.3 A (slow) Max. 6.3 A (slow) Power consumption <10 W, typical <10 W, typical Safety class I with parts according to II and III to

DIN EN 60730-1 IP00

Degree of protection

Note: The burner or boiler manufacturer must ensure degree of protection IP40 for burner controls as per DIN EN 60529 through adequate installation of the LME7...

Perm. mounting position Optional Weight Approx. 490 g

4.2 Terminal rating Inputs

Mains voltage: Input current depending on the operating state of the unit Under voltage UMains 120 V UMains 230 V Safety shutdown from the operating

position takes place should mains voltage drop

≤AC 75 V ≤AC 165 V

Restart is initiated when mains voltage exceeds

≥AC 100 V ≥AC 195 V

State inputs, temperature controller, temperature switch, load controller, pressure switch, air pressure switch, actuator (except safety loop) of the contact feedback network (CFN) are used for system supervision and require mains-related input voltage Input safety loop See Terminal rating outputs Input currents and input voltages

- UeMax UN +10% UN +10% - UeMin UN -15% UN -15% - IeMax 1.5 mA peak

(peak value) 1 mA peak (peak value)

- IeMin 0.8 mA peak (peak value)

0.5 mA peak (peak value)

Contact material recommended for external signal sources (air pressure switch, pressure switch-min, pressure switch-max, etc.)

Gold-plated silver contacts

Transition/settling behavior/bounce - Perm. bounce time of contacts when switching ON/OFF

Max. 50 ms (after the bounce time, the contact must stay closed or open)

UN AC 120 V AC 230 V Voltage detection

- ON >AC 60 V >AC 120 V - OFF <AC 40 V <AC 80 V

Analog input X65 DC 0...10 V/DC 0/4...20 mA/0...135 Ω

Page 31: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

31/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 4 Technical data 29.11.2011

4.3 Terminal rating Outputs

Total contact loading: Rated voltage AC 120 V

50/60 Hz AC 230 V 50/60 Hz

Unit input current X3-04 (safety loop) from: - Fan motor contactor - Ignition transformer - Fuel valves

Max. 5 A Max. 5 A

Individual contact loading: Fan motor contactor X2-01 pin 3 Rated voltage AC 120 V 50/60 Hz AC 230 V 50/60 Hz Rated current 2 A

(15A max. 0.5 s) 2 A (15A for max. 0.5s)

Power factor Cos 0.4 Cos 0.4 Alarm output X2-03/3 Rated voltage AC 120 V 50/60 Hz AC 230 V 50/60 Hz Rated current 1 A 1 A Power factor Cos >0.6 Cos >0.6 Ignition transformer X4-02 pin 3 Rated voltage AC 120 V 50/60 Hz AC 230 V 50/60 Hz Rated current 2 A 2 A Power factor Cos >0.4 Cos >0.4 Auxiliary output Rated voltage AC 120 V 50/60 Hz AC 230 V 50/60 Hz Rated current 1 A 1 A Power factor Cos >0,6 Cos >0,6 Output relay contact 2 pin 2 X2-09 pin 7 Rated voltage AC 120 V 50/60 Hz AC 230 V 50/60 Hz Rated current 1 A 1 A Power factor Cos >0.4 Cos >0.4 Fuel valves/pilot valve X7-01 pin 3 Rated voltage AC 120 V 50/60 Hz AC 230 V 50/60 Hz Rated current 1 A 1 A Power factor Cos >0.4 Cos >0.4 Fuel valves 1 X7-04 pin 4/fuel valve 2 X7-02 pin 3 Rated voltage AC 120 V 50/60 Hz AC 230 V 50/60 Hz Rated current

- Valve proving inactive 2 A 2 A

- Valve proving active 1 A 1 A Power factor Cos >0.4 Cos >0.4

Note: When activating valve proving (e.g. on shutdown), the load on the valve terminals is restricted. If the load is not reduced, the design lifetime is about 100,000 burner start cycles!

Safety valve X6-03 pin 3 Rated voltage AC 120 V

50/60 Hz AC 230 V 50/60 Hz

Total current 1.5 A 1.5 A Power factor Cos >0.6 Cos >0.6 Safety loop X3-04 pin 2, safety valve X6-03 pin 3, POC X2-02 pin 3 Rated voltage AC 120 V

50/60 Hz AC 230 V 50/60 Hz

Total current 2 A 2 A Power factor Cos >0.4 Cos >0.4

Page 32: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

32/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 4 Technical data 29.11.2011

4.4 Cable lengths Mains supply line Max. 100 m (100 pF/m) Display, BCI For use under the burner hood or in a

control panel Max. 1 m (100 pF/m)

Load controller X5-03 Max. 30 m (100 pF/m) Safety Loop Max. 30 m (100 pF/m) Safety valve Max. 30 m (100 pF/m) Fuel valve Max. 30 m (100 pF/m) Ignition transformer Max. 30 m (100 pF/m) Remote reset (lay separate cable) Max. 30 m (100 pF/m) Other lines Max. 30 m (100 pF/m)

Specification as per EN 60730-1 Type of shutdown or interruption of each circuit Shutdown with microswitch 1 pole Mode of operation Type 2 B

4.5 Actuators

CLOSE/ignition position/OPEN X2-09 pin 1, X2-09 pin 2, X2-09 pin 3

1 mio. switching cycles

1 mio. switching cycles

Rated voltage AC 120 V 50/60 Hz AC 230 V 50/60 Hz Rated current 0,1 A 0,1 A Power factor Cos >0.6 Cos >0.6

Output K2/2 X2-09/7 AC 230 V, 50/60 Hz Rated current Max. 1 A Power factor Cos >0.4 Feedback via input of cam V2, depending on the switching contact used in actuator X2-09/8!

4.6 Cross-sectional areas The cross-sectional areas of the mains power lines (L, N, and PE) and, if required, the safety loop (safety limit thermostat, water shortage, etc.) must be sized for rated currents according to the selected external primary fuse. The cross-sectional areas of the other cables must be sized in accordance with the internal unit fuse (max. 6.3 AT).

Min. cross-sectional area 0.75 mm² (single- or multicore to VDE 0100)

Cable insulation must be suited for the respective temperature and environmental conditions!

Page 33: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

33/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 4 Technical data 29.11.2011

4.7 Signal cable AGV50... 4.7.1 AZL2... BCI Signal cable Color white

Unshielded Conductor 4 x 0.141 mm² With jack RJ11

Cable length - AGV50.100

1 m

Supplier (alternative) Recommendation: Hütter http://www.hkt-netzwerktechnik.at/index.htm

Location Under the burner hood (arrangements for SKII EN60730-1 additionally required)

4.8 Dummy plug for RJ11 Dummy plug For 6 pin modular plug (RJ11) Supplier Recommendation:

Molex Order no.: 085 999 3256

4.9 Environmental conditions Storage DIN EN 60721-3-1 Climatic conditions Class 1K3 Mechanical conditions Class 1M2 Temperature range -40...+70 °C Humidity <95% r.h. Transport DIN EN 60721-3-2 Climatic conditions Class 2K3 Mechanical conditions Class 2M2 Temperature range -40...+70 °C Humidity <95% r.h. Operation DIN EN 60721-3-3 Climatic conditions Class 3K3 Mechanical conditions Class 3M2 Temperature range -40...+60 °C Humidity <95% r.h.

Warning! Condensation, formation of ice and ingress of water are not permitted! If not observed, there is a risk of impairment of safety functions and of electric shock hazard.

Page 34: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

34/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 4 Technical data 29.11.2011

4.10 Flame supervision 4.10.1 Ionization probe No-load voltage at terminal ionization probe (X10–05, terminal 2)

AC 300 V

Warning! The ionization probe must be protected against electric shock

hazard! When monitoring ionization currents in earth-free mains, connect

terminal X10-05/1 to burner ground Short-circuit current Max. AC 1 mA Required detector current Min. DC 1 µA, display approx. 20% Possible detector current Max. DC 40 µA, display approx. 100% Permissible length of detector cable (laid separately)

30 m (core-earth 100 pF/m)

Note: As the detector line capacitance (line length) increases, the voltage at the ionization probe und thus the detector current will drop. Extremely long line lengths and very high-ohmic flames might necessitate the use of low-capacitance cable (e.g. ignition cable). In spite of special electronic circuits designed to compensate possible adverse effects of the ignition spark on the ionization current, it must be made certain that the minimum detector current required is already available during the ignition phase. If this is not the case, the primary ignition transformer connections must be interchanged and/or the electrodes relocated.

Threshold values when flame is supervised by ionization - Start prevention (extraneous light) - Start prevention (extraneous light) - Operation - Operation

ION input

Ionization current in µA

Fla

me

inte

nsity

in %

100

90

80

70

60

50

40

30

20

10

0

Figure 3: Ionization input at AC 120 V/AC 230 V

Page 35: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

35/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 4 Technical data 29.11.2011

Ionization probe

LME7...M

CION

X10-05/2

X10-05/1

Figure 4: Measuring circuit for ionization probe

Legend C Electrolytic condenser 100...470 µF; DC 10...25 V

ION Ionization probe

M Microammeter Ri max. 5,000

Warning! Simultaneous operation of QRA... and ionization probe is not permitted! If not observed, there is a risk of impairment of safety functions.

Measuring circuit for detector current measurement

Page 36: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

36/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 4 Technical data 29.11.2011

4.10.2 Flame detector QRA2.../QRA4.U/QRA10...

Caution! If flame detectors QRA2…/QRA4.U/QRA10... are used for flame supervision with the LME7..., it must be ensured that the burner control is permanently connected to power (conforming to EN 298), thus enabling the system to detect flame detector failures during startup and shutdown. Generally, the system works with QRA... flame detectors in intermittent operation. If this is not observed, there is a risk of loss of safety functions. Technical Data see Data Sheet N7712, flame detector QRA2.../QRA10…! Technical Data see Data Sheet N7711, flame detector QRA4.U!

Threshold values when flame is supervised by QRA... - Start prevention (extraneous light) - Start prevention (extraneous light) - Operation - Operation Operating voltage AC 280 V ±15% Mains frequency 50...60 Hz 6% Required detector current Min. 70 µA Possible detector current - Operation

Max. 700 µA

Perm. length of detector cable - Normal cable, laid separately ¹)

Max. 100 m

¹) Multicore cable not permitted

Flame detector QRA...

QRA...Figure 5: Measuring circuit for QRA...

Legend A Exposure to light

C Electrolytic condenser 100...470 µF; DC 10...25 V

M Microammeter Ri max. 5,000

Warning! Input QRA... is not short-circuit-proof!

Short-circuits of X10-06/2 against earth can destroy the QRA... input Simultaneous operation of flame detector QRA... and ionization probe is not

permitted. If not observed, there is a risk of impairment of safety functions. To make certain the age of the UV tube can be determined, the LME7...

basic unit must always be connected to mains supply. If not observed, there is a risk of impairment of safety functions.

Measuring circuit for detector current measurement

Page 37: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

37/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 5 Dimensions 29.11.2011

5 Dimensions Dimensions in mm

nfo+-A

7105m02/0510

Figure 6: Dimensions of LME7...

LME7...

Page 38: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

38/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 6 Function 29.11.2011

6 Function 6.1 Preconditions for burner startup Burner control must be reset All contacts in the line are closed, there is a request for heat No undervoltage Air pressure switch or POC must be in its no-load position, or Dbr1 is connected to

X2-02 (depending on program sequence) Flame detector is darkened and there is no extraneous light All contacts in the safety loop are closed

6.2 Undervoltage Safety shutdown from the operating position takes place should mains voltage drop

below about AC 75 V (UN = AC 120 V)

Restart is initiated when mains voltage exceeds about AC 100 V (UN = AC 120 V) Safety shutdown from the operating position takes place should mains voltage drop

below about AC 165 V (UN = AC 230 V)

Restart is initiated when mains voltage exceeds about AC 195 V (UN = AC 230 V)

6.3 Controlled intermittent operation Depending on parameter 239, after no more than 24 hours of continuous operation, the burner control initiates automatic controlled shutdown followed by a restart, against parameter 239.

Page 39: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

39/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 6 Function 29.11.2011

6.4 Control sequence in the event of fault If lockout occurs, the outputs for the fuel valves, the burner motor and the ignition equipment are immediately deactivated (<1 second). Cause Response

Mains voltage failure Restart

Voltage below undervoltage threshold Safety shutdown

Voltage above undervoltage threshold Restart

Extraneous light before safety time Lockout

Extraneous light during waiting time Start prevention, lockout after approx. 30 seconds at the latest

No flame at the end of safety time Lockout end of safety time

Loss of flame during operation Factory setting: Lockout Can be parameterized: (Depending on program module, e.g. PME73.8...) 1 x repetition

Air pressure switch has welded in the operating position

Start prevention, lockout after 30 seconds

Air pressure switch has welded in the no-load position

Lockout at the end of the specified time

No air pressure signal on completion of the specified time

Lockout, with breakdown time ≥0.3 seconds

POC contact is open during startup Lockout, approx. 5 seconds after temperature thermostat or pressurestat or temperature or pressure switch on

Pressure switch-min: Failure during operation

Shutdown and start prevention

In the event of lockout, the LME7… remains locked and the red fault signal lamp lights up. The burner control can immediately be reset. This state is also maintained in the event of mains failure.

6.5 Resetting the burner control When lockout occurs, the burner control can immediately be reset. To do this, press the lockout reset button (info button) for about 1 second (<3 seconds). The LME7… can only be reset when all contacts in the line are closed and when there is no undervoltage.

Page 40: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

40/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 6 Function 29.11.2011

6.6 Limitation of repetitions (can be parameterized)

(depending on parameter 240)

6.6.1 Parameter 240/240.00 If the flame is lost during operation, a maximum 1 repetition per controlled startup can be performed via the temperature thermostat or pressurestat, or else lockout will be initiated. 6.6.2 Parameter 240.01 If no flame is established by the end of the safety time, a maximum of 3 repetitions per controlled shutdown are possible. With repetitions from the operating position (loss of flame), the flame must have been established on completion of the safety time (independent of parameter 240.01), or else lockout will be initiated.

Page 41: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

41/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 7 Operation, indication, diagnostics 29.11.2011

7 Operation, indication, diagnostics 7.1 Operation

7105

z04/

0707

nfo

The lockout reset button (info button) is the key operating element for resetting the burner control and for activating/deactivating the diagnostics functions.

LED

7106

z02

e/07

06 Red

Yellow

Green

The multicolor signal lamp is the key indicating element for visual diagnostics.

Both lockout reset button and signal lamp are located in the control panel. There are 2 diagnostics choices: 1. Visual diagnostics: Indication of operating state or diagnostics of cause of fault 2. Diagnostics: Via BCI to AZL2... display and operating unit Visual diagnostics: In normal operation, the different operating states are indicated in the form of color codes according to the color code table given below.

7.2 Indication of operating state During startup, state indication takes place according to the following table:

Color code table for multicolor signal lamp

State Color code Color

Waiting time, other waiting states ......................................... OFF Ignition phase, ignition controlled Blinking yellow Operation, flame o.k. .......................................... Green Operation, flame not o.k. Blinking green Extraneous light on burner startup Green-red Undervoltage Yellow-red Fault, alarm ......................................... Red Error code output (see Error code table)

Blinking red

Interface diagnostics Red flicker light Heating request ......................................... Yellow New program card Yellow-yellow-red

...... Steady on Red OFF Yellow Green

Legend

Page 42: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

42/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 7 Operation, indication, diagnostics 29.11.2011

7.3 Diagnostics of cause of fault After lockout, the red fault signal lamp remains steady on. In that condition, visual diagnostics of cause of fault according to the error code table can be activated by pressing the lockout reset button (info button) for more than 3 seconds. Pressing the lockout reset button (info button) again for at least 3 seconds, interface diagnostics will be activated. If, by accident, interface diagnostics has been activated, in which case the slightly red light of the signal lamp flickers, it can be deactivated by pressing again the lockout reset button (info button) for >3 seconds. The instant of switching over is indicated by a yellow light pulse. The following sequence activates the diagnostics of cause of fault:

> 3 s

Lockout position

xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx

> 3 s < 3 s

7109

z04/

1008

ResetOn

Lockout position

nfo nfo nfo

> 3 s

nfo

Flashing

Error code tableInterface diagnostics

PC / analyzer

Visual diagnostics

Lockout position

Figure 7: Diagnostics of cause of fault

Page 43: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

43/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 7 Operation, indication, diagnostics 29.11.2011

Error code table

Red blink code of fault signal lamp Possible cause

2 x blinks No establishment of flame at the end of the safety time - Faulty or soiled fuel valves - Faulty or soiled flame detector - Poor adjustment of burner, no fuel - Faulty ignition equipment

3 x blinks Air pressure switch faulty - Loss of air pressure after specified time - Air pressure switch welded in no-load position

4 x blinks Extraneous light on burner startup

5 x blinks Time supervision air pressure switch - Air pressure switch welded in working position

6 x blinks Actuator position not reached - Actuator faulty - Wrong adjustment of cam - Actuator defective or blocked - False connection - Misadjustment

7 x blinks Too many losses of flame during operation (limitation of repetitions) - Faulty or soiled fuel valves - Faulty or soiled flame detector - Poor adjustment of burner

8 x blinks Free

9 x blinks Free

10 x blinks Wiring error or internal error, output contacts, other faults

12 x blinks Valve proving - Fuel valve 1 leaking

13 x blinks Valve proving - Fuel valve 2 leaking

14 x blinks Error in connection with valve closure control POC

15 x blinks Error code ≥15 (e.g. depending on type of program module) Error code 20: Failure of gas pressure switch-min Error code 22: Error of safety loop

During the time the cause of fault is diagnosed, the control outputs are deactivated - Burner remains shut down - External fault indication (alarm) at terminal X2-03, pin 3 steady on Diagnostics of cause of fault is quit and the burner switched on again by resetting the burner control. Press the lockout reset button (info button) for about 1 second (<3 seconds).

Page 44: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

44/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 8 Inputs/outputs 29.11.2011

8 Inputs/outputs

X2- 0

9X

7-0

2X

7-0

1X

7-04

X4

-02

X3

-04

X2

-01

X2

-02

X6-

03X

9-0

4X

5-0

1X

3-0

2X

5-03

X1

0-06

X10

-05

X76X66X65

7105

z03/

0710X56

Figure 8: Inputs/outputs

Page 45: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

45/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 9 Basic unit 29.11.2011

9 Basic unit 9.1 Description of inputs and outputs This section covers the key features of the basic unit’s inputs and outputs. For exact use of the inputs and the activation of outputs, see chapter Sequence diagrams.

LME...

7105z14/0911

QRA...

X10

-06

1

2

Figure 9: Flame signal input X10-06

Connection choices: Ionization probe

QRA2.../QRA10...

QRA4.U

Flame signal input and flame detector X10–06

Page 46: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

46/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 9 Basic unit 29.11.2011

9.2 Digital input 9.2.1 Safety Loop X3–04, terminal 1 and 2 Input for connection of the safety loop. When any of the series-connected contacts included in the loop opens, power supply to the fuel valves, the fan and the ignition equipment is instantly cut. The safety loop includes the following components: External burner switch (ON/OFF) Safety limiter/safety pressure limiter External control thermostat and/or pressurestat, if required Water shortage switch

LME...

7105z15e/1111

Safety loop(optional pressure switch-max (Pmax))

Supply signal for safety loop

Protective earth (PE)

Power supply (N)

ST

B

Wa

ter

sho

rta

ge

Si

L

1

2

3

4

5

Figure 10: Safety Loop X3-04

For diagnostic purposes, the contacts of the components included in the safety loop are combined for delivering the safety loop signal. If there is no such signal, the system initiates safety shutdown in any event. If, with Load controller ON/OFF) there is no signal from the safety loop (start prevention), error code LOC 22 is translated to text display. 9.2.2 Input for external controller (ON/OFF) X5–03, terminal 1 When the external control loop is closed, the internal input message Heat request is generated. A heat request exists when the external controller signal is pending and, depending on the configuration, a load controller calls for heat When there are no more requests for heat, the burner shuts down. The fuel valves are closed, either immediately when the timer has elapsed, or when the low-fire position is reached, depending on the parameter settings

Note Burner startup takes place only when this contact is closed.

LME...

7105z18e/1211

X5

-03

External load controller (ON/OFF)

External load controller OPEN/stage 2

“L” for controller control

ON/OFF1

Figure 11: Inputs for external load controller ON/OFF X5-03

Page 47: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

47/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 9 Basic unit 29.11.2011

9.2.3 Air pressure switch X3–02 Input for connection of an air pressure switch. Air pressure is anticipated when the fan is switched on. If there is no air pressure signal, the system initiates lockout. The air pressure switch must have an NO contact. If no air pressure switch is required (e.g. when firing on oil), a wire link to the fan output must be fitted (X3-02 terminal 1 to X2-01 terminal 3).

Caution! The OEM must check to see whether the burner can be operated without air pressure switch. This may necessitate a special approval, depending on the type of application.

LME...

7105z17e/1111

X3-

02

Air pressure switch (LP)

“L” for air pressure switch (LP)2

1

Figure 12: Air pressure switch X3-02

Page 48: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

48/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 10 PME71.401... 29.11.2011

10 PME71.401... 10.1 Program sequence PME71.401...

For connection diagram fuel train (G)

7105d69e/0611

M

Z

V1

V2a

AL

K1X2-02 Pin 3

R

LR-OPEN

Not active

LP

Pmin

ION / QRA

X3-04 Pin 5

Relaycontact Function / inputs

Display and operation unit parameter number

LED permanent

LED flashing

tw t10 t3 t3n t4 t8

Standby Startup Operation Shutdown

t1 TSA

224 225 226 257 230 240 234

Relaycontact

Function / outputs

SKX3-04 Pin 1

X5-03 Pin 1

X5-03 Pin 3

X65 Pin 1

X5-03 Pin 2

X65 Pin 1

X3-02 Pin 1

X5-01 Pin 2

X2-02 Pin 4

X9-04 Pin 2

SVK1X6-03 Pin 3

K4X2-01 Pin 3

K5X4-02 Pin 3

K7X7-04 Pin 4

X7-01 Pin 3

K2/1X2-03 Pin 3

Phase number AZL2... 21 22 22 30 30 38 40 42 44 74 10

X2-02 Pin 4

240240 240 240 240

oP:P2 oP:P1

Phase number 7 segment in the LME... 21 22 22 30 30 38 40 42 44 74 10oP2 oP1

Not active

Not active

POC

Not active

Not active

Not active

POC

2nd stage 1st stage

Figure 13: Program sequence PME71.401... for connection diagram fuel train (G)

Page 49: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

49/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 10 PME71.401... 29.11.2011

Phase number

Function

LOC Lockout shutdown phase

OFF Standby, waiting for heat request

oP1/oP:P1 Operation of first stage

oP2/oP:P2 Operation of 2nd stage

10 Home run

21 Safety valve ON, air pressure switch in no-load position Check if POC is closed

22 Part 1: Fan motor ON Part 2: Specified time air pressure switch Message (timeout), stabilization of air pressure switch

30 Part 1: Prepurge time without flame simulation test Part 2: Prepurge time with flame simulation test (2.1 seconds)

38 Preignition time

40 Postignition time, parameter 257 + 0.3 seconds

42 Flame detection

44 Interval: End of ignition safety time and release of load controller

74 Postpurge time

90 Pressure switch-min open → safety shutdown

Key to phases

Page 50: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

50/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 10 PME71.401... 29.11.2011

10.2 Connection diagrams for fuel train applications (examples)

10.2.1 Gas direct ignition (G), 1-stage

SV

V1

Program G Gas direct 1-stage

X7-04

LME71.000...

Figure 14: Connection diagram fuel train gas direct ignition (G), 1-stage

10.2.2 Gas direct ignition (G), 2-stage

SV

V1

Program G Gas direct 2-stage

X7-01 X7-04

LME71.000...

V2a

Figure 15: Connection diagram fuel train gas direct ignition (G), 2-stage

Page 51: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

51/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105de Infrastructure & Cities Sector 10 PME71.401... 29.11.2011

10.3 Time table and settings for program sequence PME71.401... Type Times in seconds

PME71.401... tw TSA max.

t1 P225 min.

t3 P226min.

t3n P257

approx.

t4 P230min.

t8 P234 min.

t10 P224

approx. 1) 2) 3)

Requirements 2.5 3 30 2 2.5 8 0 15 --- --- ---

Factory setting --- t3n+0.45 29.106+2.1 2.058 2.205+0.3 8.232 0 13.818 --- --- ---

Max. 2.5 14 1237+2.1 37.485 13.23+0.3 74.97 1237 13.818 1 0.45 0.45

Min. --- --- 0+2.1 1.029 0+0.3 3.234 0 0 0.3 0.3 ---

Step size --- --- 4.851 0.147 0.147 0.294 4.851 0.254 --- --- --- Function parameter Parameter number Factory setting

Repetition in the event of loss of flame during operation <2: None = 2: 1 x

P240 0

Legend tw Waiting time t3n Postignition time (P257 +0.3 seconds) TSA Safety time t4 Interval: End of safety time – load controller release t1 Prepurge time t8 Postpurge time t3 Preignition time t10 Specified time air pressure switch state message (timeout) 1) Response time to a change of signal by the air pressure switch (opens) and response time in the event of loss of flame 2) Response time to a change of signal by the inputs (e.g. pressure switch-min) 3) Flame detection time

Page 52: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

52/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105de Infrastructure & Cities Sector 10 PME71.401... 29.11.2011

10.4 LME71.000..: Inputs and outputs/internal connection diagram

Figure 16: LME71.000...: Inputs and outputs/internal connection diagram

Page 53: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

53/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105de Infrastructure & Cities Sector 10 PME71.401... 29.11.2011

10.5 Parameter list PME71.401... (AZL2...)

Value range Parameter

number

Parameter Edit

Min. Max.

Resolution Factory setting Password level

reading from level

Password level

writing from level

000 Internal parameter

41 Heating engineer's password (4 characters) Edit xxxx xxxx --- --- --- OEM

42 OEM's password (5 characters) Edit xxxxx xxxxx --- --- --- OEM

60 Backup/restore Edit --- --- --- --- --- SO

100 General

102 Identification date Read only --- --- --- --- Info ---

103 Identification number Read only 0 9999 1 0 Info ---

113 Burner identification Edit x xxxxxxxx 1 --- Info SO

140 Mode display of display and operating unit AZL2...

1 = standard (program phase)

2 = flame 1 (QRA.../ION)

3 = flame 2 (QRB.../QRC...) not used

4 = active power (power value)

Edit 1 4 1 1 SO SO

164 Number of startups resettable Resettable 0 999999 1 0 Info Info

166 Total number of startups Read only 0 999999 1 0 Info ---

170.00 Switching cycles actuator relay K12 Read only 0 999999 1 0 Info ---

170.01 Switching cycles actuator relay K11 Read only 0 999999 1 0 Info ---

170.02 Switching cycles actuator relay contact 2 Read only 0 999999 1 0 Info ---

170.03 Switching cycles actuator relay contact 1 Read only 0 999999 1 0 Info ---

171 Max. switching cycles actuator relay Read only 0 999999 1 0 Info ---

200 Burner control

224 Specified time air pressure switch Edit 0 s 13.818 s 0.294 s 13.818 s SO OEM 225 Prepurge time -2,1 seconds Edit 0 s 1237 s 4.851 s 29.106 s SO OEM 226 Preignition time Edit 1.029 s 37.485 s 0.147 s 2.058 s SO OEM 230 Interval: End of safety time – load controller release Edit 3.234 s 74.97 s 0.294 s 8.232 s SO OEM 234 Postpurge time Edit 0 s 1237 s 4.851 s 0 SO OEM 240 Repetition in the event of loss of flame during

operation

0 = none

1 = none

2 = 1 x repetition

Edit 0 2 1 0 SO OEM

257 Postignition time -0.3 seconds Edit 0 s 13.23 s 0.147 s 2.205 s SO OEM

Page 54: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

54/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105de Infrastructure & Cities Sector 10 PME71.401... 29.11.2011

Value range Parameter

number

Parameter Edit

Min. Max.

Resolution Factory setting Password level

reading from level

Password level

writing from level

700 Error history

701 Current error:

00: Error code

01: Startup meter reading

02: MMI phase

03: Power value

Read only

2

0

---

0%

255

999999

---

100%

1

1

---

1

--- Service ---

702 Error history former 1:

00: Error code

01: Startup meter reading

02: MMI phase

03: Power value

Read only

2

0

---

0%

255

999999

---

100%

1

1

---

1

--- Service ---

711 Error history former 10:

00: Error code

01: Startup meter reading

02: MMI phase

03: Power value

Read only

2

0

---

0%

255

999999

---

100%

1

1

---

1

--- Service ---

900 Process data

936 Normalized speed Read only 0% 100% 0.01% --- Service ---

951 Mains voltage Read only 0 V LME71.000A1: 175 V

LME71.000A2: 350 V

1 V --- Service ---

954 Flame intensity Read only 0% 100% 1% --- Service ---

Page 55: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

55/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 11 PME71.402... 29.11.2011

11 PME71.402... 11.1 Program sequence PME71.402...

For connection diagram fuel trains (G)/(Gp1/1)

7105d70e/0611

M

Z

V1

PV

AL

K1X2-02 Pin 3

R

Not active

LP

Pmin

ION / QRA

X3-04 Pin 5

Relaycontact Function / inputs

Display and operation unit parameter number

LED permanent

LED flashing

tw t10 t3 t3n t4 t8

Standby Startup Operation Shutdown

t1 TSA

224 225 226 257 231 240 234

Relaycontact

Function / outputs

SKX3-04 Pin 1

X5-03 Pin 1

X5-03 Pin 3

X65 Pin 1

X5-03 Pin 2

X65 Pin 1

X3-02 Pin 1

X5-01 Pin 2

X2-02 Pin 4

X9-04 Pin 2

SVK1X6-03 Pin 3

K4X2-01 Pin 3

K5X4-02 Pin 3

K7X7-04 Pin 4

X7-01 Pin 3

K2/1X2-03 Pin 3

Phase number AZL2... 21 22 22 30 30 38 40 42 44 74 10

X2-02 Pin 4

240240 240 240 240

oP:P1

Phase number 7 segment in the LME... 21 22 22 30 30 38 40 42 44 74 10oP1

Not active

Not active

POC

Not active

Not active

Not active

POC

50 50

Repetition in the event ofloss of flame during

operation (depending on parameter 240)

Not active

InputK7X7-04 Pin 3

t9

50 50

t22

K1

Figure 17: Program sequence PME71.402... for connection diagram fuel trains (G)/Gp1/1)

Page 56: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

56/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 11 PME71.402... 29.11.2011

Phase number

Function

LOC Lockout shutdown phase

OFF Standby, waiting for heat request

oP1/oP:P1 Operation

10 Home run

21 Safety valve ON, air pressure switch in no-load position Check if POC is closed

22 Part 1: Fan motor ON Part 2: Specified time air pressure switch Message (timeout), stabilization of air pressure switch

30 Part 1: Prepurge time without flame simulation test Part 2: Prepurge time with flame simulation test (2.1 seconds)

38 Preignition time

40 Postignition time, parameter 257 + 0.3 seconds

42 Flame detection

44 Interval: End of ignition safety time and fuel valve 1 ON

50 Part 1: Interval: Fuel valve 1 ON and pilot valve OFF Part 2: Response time

74 Postpurge time

90 Pressure switch-min open → safety shutdown

Key to phases

Page 57: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

57/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 11 PME71.402... 29.11.2011

11.2 Connection diagrams for fuel train applications (examples)

11.2.1 Gas direct ignition (G), 1-stage

SV

V1

Program G Gas direct 1-stage

X7-01 X7-04

Dbr2

LME71.000...

Figure 18: Connection diagram fuel train gas direct ignition (G), 1-stage

11.2.2 Gas pilot ignition 1 (Gp1/1), 1-stage

SV

V1

Program Gp1/1 Gas pilot 1-stage

PV

X7-01 X7-04

LME71.000...

Figure 19: Connection diagram fuel train gas pilot ignition 1 (Gp1/1), 1-stage

Page 58: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

58/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 11 PME71.402... 29.11.2011

11.3 Time table and settings for program sequence PME71.402... Type Times in seconds

PME71.402... tw TSA max.

t1 P225 min.

t3 P226min.

t3n P257

approx.

t4 P230min.

t8 P234min.

t9 P231

approx.

t10 P224

approx.

t22 approx.

1) 2) 3)

Requirements 2.5 3 30 3 2.5 3 15 3 15 --- --- --- ---

Factory setting --- t3n+0.45 29.106+2.1 3.087 2.205+0.3 3.234 19.404 2.646 13.818 t9+1 --- --- ---

Max. 2.5 14 1237+2.1 37.485 13.23+0.3 74.97 1237 74.97 13.818 --- 1 0.45 0.45

Min. --- --- 0+2.1 1.029 0+0.3 3.234 0 0 0 --- 0.3 0.3 ---

Step size --- --- 4.851 0.147 0.147 0.294 4.851 0.294 0.294 --- --- --- ---

Function parameter Parameter number Factory setting

Continuous pilot 0: OFF 1: ON

P247 0

Repetition in the event of loss of flame during operation <2: None = 2: 1 x

P240 0

Legend tw Waiting time t4 Interval: End of safety time – fuel valve 1 ON TSA Safety time t8 Postpurge time t1 Prepurge time t9 Interval: Fuel valve 1 ON and pilot valve OFF t3 Preignition time t10 Specified time air pressure switch state message (timeout) t3n Postignition time (P257 +0.3 seconds) t22 2nd safety time 1) Response time to a change of signal by the air pressure switch (opens) and response time in the event of loss of flame 2) Response time to a change of signal by the inputs (e.g. pressure switch-min) 3) Flame detection time

Page 59: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

59/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 11 PME71.402... 29.11.2011

11.4 LME71.000..: Inputs and outputs/internal connection diagram

Figure 20: LME71.000...: Inputs and outputs/internal connection diagram

Page 60: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

60/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 11 PME71.402... 29.11.2011

11.5 Parameter list PME71.402... (AZL2...)

Value range Parameter

number

Parameter Edit

Min. Max.

Resolution Factory setting Password level

reading from level

Password level

writing from level

000 Internal parameter

41 Heating engineer's password (4 characters) Edit xxxx xxxx --- --- --- OEM

42 OEM's password (5 characters) Edit xxxxx xxxxx --- --- --- OEM

60 Backup/restore Edit --- --- --- --- --- SO

100 General

102 Identification date Read only --- --- --- --- Info ---

103 Identification number Read only 0 9999 1 0 Info ---

113 Burner identification Edit x xxxxxxxx 1 --- Info SO

^^ Mode display of display and operating unit AZL2...

1 = standard (program phase)

2 = flame 1 (QRA.../ION)

3 = flame 2 (QRB.../QRC...) not used

4 = active power (power value)

Edit 1 4 1 1 SO SO

164 Number of startups resettable Resettable 0 999999 1 0 Info Info

166 Total number of startups Read only 0 999999 1 0 Info ---

170.00 Switching cycles actuator relay K12 Read only 0 999999 1 0 Info ---

170.01 Switching cycles actuator relay K11 Read only 0 999999 1 0 Info ---

170.02 Switching cycles actuator relay contact 2 Read only 0 999999 1 0 Info ---

170.03 Switching cycles actuator relay contact 1 Read only 0 999999 1 0 Info ---

171 Max. switching cycles actuator relay Read only 0 999999 1 0 Info ---

Page 61: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

61/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 11 PME71.402... 29.11.2011

Parameter Parameter Edit Value range Resolution Factory setting Password level Password level

number Min. Max. reading from level writing from level

200 Burner control

224 Specified time air pressure switch Edit 0 s 13.818 s 0.294 s 13.818 s SO OEM 225 Prepurge time -2,1 seconds Edit 0 s 1237 s 4.851 s 29.106 s SO OEM 226 Preignition time Edit 1.029 s 37.485 s 0.147 s 3.087 s SO OEM 230 Interval: End of safety time – fuel valve 1 ON Edit 3.234 s 74.97 s 0.294 s 3.234 s SO OEM 231 Interval: Fuel valve 1 ON – pilot valve OFF Edit 0 s 74.97 s 0.294 s 2.646 s SO OEM 234 Postpurge time Edit 0 s 1237 s 4.851 s 19.404 s SO OEM 240 Repetition in the event of loss of flame during

operation

0 = none

1 = none

2 = 1 x repetition

Edit 0 2 1 0 SO OEM

247 Continuous pilot (during operation)

0 = OFF

1 = ON

Edit 0 1 1 0 SO OEM

257 Postignition time -0.3 seconds Edit 0 s 13.23 s 0.147 s 2.205 s SO OEM

Page 62: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

62/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 11 PME71.402... 29.11.2011

Value range Parameter

number

Parameter Edit

Min. Max.

Resolution Factory setting Password level

reading from level

Password level

writing from level

700 Error history

701 Current error:

00: Error code

01: Startup meter reading

02: MMI phase

03: Power value

Read only

2

0

---

0%

255

999999

---

100%

1

1

---

1

--- Service ---

702 Error history former 1:

00: Error code

01: Startup meter reading

02: MMI phase

03: Power value

Read only

2

0

---

0%

255

999999

---

100%

1

1

---

1

--- Service ---

711 Error history former 10:

00: Error code

01: Startup meter reading

02: MMI phase

03: Power value

Read only

2

0

---

0%

255

999999

---

100%

1

1

---

1

--- Service ---

900 Process data

936 Normalized speed Read only 0% 100% 0.01% --- Service ---

951 Mains voltage Read only 0 V LME71.000A1: 175 V

LME71.000A2: 350 V

1 V --- Service ---

954 Flame intensity Read only 0% 100% 1% --- Service ---

Page 63: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

63/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 12 PME71.901... 29.11.2011

12 PME71.901... 12.1 Program sequence PME71.901...

For connection diagram fuel train (G) without valve proving For connection diagram fuel train (G) with valve proving

7105d71e/1111

M

Z

V1

V2

AL

K1X2-02 Pin 3

Sp

eed

po

ints

P2 (high-fire)

P0 (ignition load)

P1 (low-fire)

0 (no-load speed)

R

LR-OPEN

LR-CLOSE

Optional (LP)if P235=1

Pmin

P LT

ION / QRA

Not active

X3-04 Pin 5

Relaycontact Function/inputs

Operating unit parameter number

LED permanent

LED flashing

tw t11 t10 t12 t3 t3n t4 t8 td4 td1 td3 td2

Standby Startup Operation Shutdown Valve proving

if parameter P241 =1 (ON)

Can be parameterized

t1 TSA

259 225 260 226 257 234

Relaycontact Function/outputs

SKX3-04 Pin 1

X5-03 Pin 1

X5-03 Pin 3

X65 Pin 1

X5-03 Pin 2

X65 Pin 1

X3-02 Pin 1

X5-01 Pin 2

X2-02 Pin 4

X9-04 Pin 2

PWMK1X6-03 Pin 3

K4X2-01 Pin 3

K5X4-02 Pin 3

K7X7-04 Pin 4

X7-01 Pin 3

K2/1X2-03 Pin 3

Phase number 21 22 24 22 30 30 36 38 40 42 44 72 74 10 80 81 82 83 oP: xx (actual load in %) 74

224

t11

POC

POC

Standbyspeed

Prepurge speed

Ignition load speed

High-fire speed

Modulation rangeLow-fire speed

Postpurge speed Purge speed

242 243 244 245240240240240240240

*1

*2

Figure 21: Program sequence PME71.901... for connection diagram fuel train (G)

Page 64: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

64/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 12 PME71.901... 29.11.2011

Phase number

Function

LOC Lockout shutdown phase

OFF Standby, waiting for heat request

oP Part 1: Request load controller OPEN Part 2: Modulation of fan motor speed toward high-fire Part 3: High-fire reached Part 4: Request load controller CLOSED Part 5: Modulation of fan motor speed toward low-fire Part 6: Low-fired reached

10 Settling time, fan motor standby speed

21 Safety valve ON, air pressure switch in no-load position Check if POC is closed, fan motor speed is reduced to 0

22 Part 1: Fan motor ON Part 2: Specified time air pressure switch Message (timeout), stabilization of air pressure switch

24 Settling time, fan motor prepurge speed

30 Part 1: Prepurge time without flame simulation test Part 2: Prepurge time with flame simulation test (2.1 seconds)

36 Speed settling time, fan motor ignition load speed

38 Preignition time

40 Postignition time, parameter 257 + 0.3 seconds

42 Flame detection

44 Interval: End of ignition safety time and release of load controller

72 Speed stabilization time, fan motor postpurge speed

74 Part 1: Operation is ended, check if postpurging is programmed Part 2: Postpurge time

80 Test space is evacuated

81 Atmospheric pressure test

82 Test space is filled

83 Gas pressure test

90 Pressure switch-min open → safety shutdown

*1 Valve proving, if P241 = 1 after main ON, lockout or P234 (postpurge time) = 0 second

*2 Valve proving, if P241 = 1 and P234 (postpurge time) >0 second

Key to phases

Page 65: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

65/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 12 PME71.901... 29.11.2011

12.2 Connection diagrams for fuel train applications (examples)

12.2.1 Gas direct ignition (G), 1-stage

SV

V1

Program G Gas direct 1-stage

X7-04

LME71.000...X7-01

Figure 22: Connection diagram fuel train gas direct ignition (G), 1-stage

12.2.2 Gas direct ignition (G), 1-stage and valve proving

SV V1

Program G Gas direct 1-stage, with valve proving

X7-04

LME71.000...

V2X7-01

Figure 23: Connection diagram fuel train gas direct ignition (G), 1-stage, with valve proving

Note: When valve proving is activated (e.g. on shutdown), the load on the valve’s terminals (according to chapter Technical data/Terminal rating Outputs) is restricted. Fuel valve 1 X7-04 pin 4/fuel valve 2 X7-02 pin 3/auxiliary output Rated voltage AC 120 V AC 230 V

50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz Rated current 1 A 1 A Power factor cos >0.4 cos >0.4 If the terminal load (according to chapter Technical data/Terminal rating Outputs) is not reduced (max. rated current 2 A, cos >0.4), the design lifetime will be reached after about 100,000 burner startup cycles!

Page 66: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

66/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 12 PME71.901... 29.11.2011

12.2.3 Gas valve proving Valve proving is dependent on parameter 241. It is employed to detect leaking gas valves and, if necessary, to prevent the valves from opening or ignition from being switched on. Lockout is initiated. Valve proving with separate pressure switch

Step 1: td4 – test space evacuating. Gas valve on the burner side is opened to bring the test space to atmospheric pressure. Step 2: td1 – test atmospheric pressure. When the gas valve has closed, the gas pressure in the test space must not exceed a certain level. Step 3: td3 – test space filling. Gas valve on the mains side opens to fill the test space. Step 4: td2 – test gas pressure. When the gas valve has closed, the gas pressure in the test space must not drop below a certain level. Legend td1 Test atmospheric pressure td2 Test gas pressure td3 Test space filling td4 Test space evacuating V… Fuel valve P LT Pressure switch valve proving

Input/output signal 1 (ON)

Input/output signal 0 (OFF)

P LT

7105d68e/1210

PLT

Fig. 24: Valve proving with separate pressure switch

Input permissible signal 1 (ON) or 0 (OFF) Valve proving can be parameterized to take place on startup, shutdown, or both. Recommendation: Perform valve proving on shutdown.

No. Parameter 241.00 Valve proving

0 = OFF 1 = ON ¹)

242 Valve proving test space evacuating 243 Valve proving time test atmospheric pressure 244 Valve proving test space filling 245 Valve proving time test gas pressure

¹) Valve proving during postpurging, if P234 >0 (postpurge time) and P241.01 = 1

Note! If valve proving is parameterized to take place on startup and shutdown, the gas valves must run through additional switching cycles. As a result, strain (wear) on the gas valves and the relay increases.

Page 67: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

67/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 12 PME71.901... 29.11.2011

Warning! The OEM must set the evacuation, filling and test times for atmospheric or mains pressure on every plant in compliance with the requirements of EN 1643. If not observed, there is a risk of impairment of safety functions. If this is not observed, there is a risk of loss of safety functions.

It must be ensured that the 2 test times are correctly set. It is to be checked whether the gas required for the test may be fed into the combustion chamber (on the relevant application). The test times are safety-related. After a reset and in the case of aborted or prevented valve proving, the unit will perform valve proving the next time it is started up (only when valve proving is activated). In the case of valve proving, prepurging is active during the startup phase, even if it has been deactivated. Examples of aborted valve proving: When the safety loop or the start prevention input for gas (containing pressure switch-min) opens during valve proving. Valve proving – calculation of leakage rate (PG - Pw) • V • 3600

tTest =

Patm • QLeck QLeck in l/h Leakage rate in liters per hour

PG in mbar Overpressure between the valves at the beginning of the test phase

PW in mbar Overpressure set on the pressure switch (normally 50%

of the gas inlet pressure)

Patm in mbar Absolute air pressure (1013 mbar normal pressure)

V in l Volume between the valves (test volume) including valve volume

and pilot pipe, if present (Gp1 mod)

tTest in s Test time

Page 68: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

68/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 12 PME71.901... 29.11.2011

12.3 Time table and settings for program sequence PME71.901... Type Times in seconds

PME71.901... tw TSA max.

t1 P225

4) min.

t3 P226 min.

t3n P257 ca.

t4 P230 min.

t8 P234

5) min.

t10 P224 ca.

t11 ca.

t12 ca.

1) 2) 3) td1 td2 min.

td3 td4

max.

Requirement 2.5 3 20 3 2.5 15 4 15 60 60 --- --- --- 10 3 Factory setting --- t3n+0.45 19.404+2.1 3.087 2.205+0.3 15.582 4.851 13.818 58.212 58.212 --- --- --- 10.29 2.646

Max. 2.5 14 1237+2.1 37.485 13.23+0.3 74.97 1237 13.818 --- --- 1 0.45 0.45 37.485 2.646 Min. --- --- 0+2.1 1.029 0+0.3 3.234 0 0 --- --- 0.3 0.3 --- 1.029 0

Step size --- --- 4.851 0.147 0.147 0.294 4.851 0.294 --- --- --- --- --- 0.147 0.147 Function parameter Parameter number Factory setting Air pressure switch input 0 = inactive 1 = active

P235 0

Repetition in the event of loss of flame at the end of safety time <2: None = 2: 1 x = 3: 2 x = 4: 3 x

P240.00 0

Repetition in the event of loss of flame during operation <2: None = 2: 1 x

P240.01 0

Valve proving 0: inactive 1: active

P241.00 0

Valve proving 0: During prepurge time 1: During postpurge time

P241.01 1

Valve proving 0: According to P241.01 1: During prepurge time and postpurge time

P241.02 0

Legend tw Waiting time t10 Specified time air pressure switch state message (timeout) TSA Safety time t11 Opening time of actuator (timeout) t1 Prepurge time t12 Closing time of actuator (timeout) t3 Preignition time t3n Postignition time (P257 +0.3 seconds) td1 Test atmospheric pressure t4 Interval: End safety time - load controller release td2 Test gas pressure t8 Postpurge time td3 Test space filling td4 Test space evacuating 1) Response time to a change of signal by the air pressure switch (opens) and response time in the event of loss of flame 2) Response time to a change of signal by the inputs (e.g. pressure switch-min) 3) Flame detection time 4) Minimum time td1 + td2 + td3 + td4 if: Parameter P241.00 = 1 (ON, after mains ON, with lockout, P234 (postpurge time) = 0 (postpurging) or P241.01 = 0 5) Minimum time td1 + td2 + td3 + td4 if: Parameter P241.00 = 1 (ON) and P234 (postpurge time) >0 (postpurging) and P241.01 = 1

Page 69: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

69/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 12 PME71.901... 29.11.2011

12.4 LME71.000...: Inputs and outputs/internal connection diagram

Figure 25: LME71.000...: Inputs and outputs/internal connection diagram

Page 70: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

70/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 12 PME71.901... 29.11.2011

12.5 Parameter list PME71.901... (AZL2...)

Value range Parameter

number

Parameter Edit

Min. Max.

Resolution Factory setting Password level

reading from level

Password level

writing from level

000 Internal parameter

41 Heating engineer's password (4 characters) Edit xxxx xxxx --- --- --- OEM

42 OEM's password (5 characters) Edit xxxxx xxxxx --- --- --- OEM

60 Backup/restore Edit Restore Backup --- --- --- SO

100 General

102 Identification date Read only --- --- --- --- Info ---

103 Identification number Read only 0 9999 1 0 Info ---

113 Burner identification Edit x xxxxxxxx 1 burnErId Info SO

123 Min. power control step Edit 1% 10% 0.1 2 SO SO

140 Mode display of display and operating unit AZL2...

1 = standard (program phase)

2 = flame 1 (QRA.../ION)

3 = flame 2 (QRB.../QRC...) not used

4 = active power (power value)

Edit 1 4 1 4 SO SO

164 Number of startups resettable Resettable 0 999999 1 0 Info Info

166 Total number of startups Read only 0 999999 1 0 Info ---

170.00 Switching cycles actuator relay K12 Read only 0 999999 1 0 Info ---

170.01 Switching cycles actuator relay K11 Read only 0 999999 1 0 Info ---

170.02 Switching cycles actuator relay contact 2 Read only 0 999999 1 0 Info ---

170.03 Switching cycles actuator relay contact 1 Read only 0 999999 1 0 Info ---

171 Max. switching cycles actuator relay Read only 0 999999 1 0 Info ---

Page 71: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

71/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 12 PME71.901... 29.11.2011

Value range Parameter-

number

Parameter Edit

Min. Max.

Resolution Factory setting Password level

reading from level

Password level

writing from level

200 Burner control

224 Special time air pressure switch Edit 0 s 13.818 s 0.294 s 13.818 s SO OEM 225 Prepurge time -2,1 seconds Edit 0 s 1237 s 4.851 s 29.106 s SO OEM 226 Preignition time Edit 1.029 s 37.485 s 0.147 s 6.174 s SO OEM 230 Interval: End of safety time - load controller release Edit 3.234 s 74.97 s 0.294 s 9.408 s SO OEM 234 Postpurge time Edit 0 s 1237 s 4.851 s 19.404 s SO OEM

235 Air pressure switch input

0 = inactive

1 = active

Edit 0 1 1 0 SO OEM

240.00 Repetition counter

Limit value Loss of flame in operation

Edit 0 2 1 0 SO OEM

240.01 Repetition counter

Limit value No flame end of safety time

Edit 0 1 1 1 SO OEM

241.00 Valve proving

0 = OFF

1 = ON

Edit 0 1 1 1 SO OEM

241.01 Valve proving

0 = during prepurge time

1 = during postpurge time

Edit 0 1 1 1 SO OEM

241.02 Valve proving

0 = according to P241.01

1 = during prepurge time and postpurge time

Edit 0 1 1 0 SO OEM

242 Valve proving test space evacuating Edit 0 s 2.648 s 0.147 s 2.648 s SO OEM 243 Valve proving time test atmospheric pressure Edit 1.029 s 37.485 s 0.147 s 10.290 s SO OEM 244 Valve proving test space filling Edit 0 s 2.648 s 0.147 s 2.648 s SO OEM 245 Valve proving time test gas pressure Edit 1.029 s 37.485 s 0.147 s 10.290 s SO OEM 257 Postignition time -0.3 seconds Edit 0 s 13.23 s 0.147 s 2.205 s SO OEM

400 Ratio control (operation)

403.00 Fan speed: Ignition load speed (P0) Edit 800 rpm 9000 rpm 10 rpm 3000 rpm HF HF

403.01 Fan speed: Low-fire speed (P1) Edit 800 rpm 9000 rpm 10 rpm 1200 rpm HF HF

403.02 Fan speed: High-fire speed (P2) Edit 800 rpm 9000 rpm 10 rpm 5700 rpm HF HF

Page 72: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

72/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 12 PME71.901... 29.11.2011

Parameter Parameter Edit Value range Resolution Factory setting Password level Password level

number Min. Max. reading from level writing from level

500 Ratio control

503.00 No-flame speeds PWM fan: Standby speed Edit 0 rpm 9000 rpm 10 rpm 0 rpm SO SO 503.01 No-flame speeds PWM fan: Purge speed Edit 800 rpm 9000 rpm 10 rpm 5700 rpm SO SO 516.00 Speed limit ignition load P0: Minimum limit Edit 800 rpm 9000 rpm 10 rpm 800 rpm SO OEM

516.01 Speed limit ignition load P0: Maximum limit Edit 800 rpm 9000 rpm 10 rpm 9000 rpm SO OEM

517.00 Speed limit low-fire P1: Minimum limit Edit 800 rpm 9000 rpm 10 rpm 800 rpm SO OEM

517.01 Speed limit low-fire P1: Maximum limit Edit 800 rpm 9000 rpm 10 rpm 9000 rpm SO OEM

518.00 Speed limit high-fire P2: Minimum limit Edit 800 rpm 9000 rpm 10 rpm 800 rpm SO OEM

518.01 Speed limit high-fire P2: Maximum limit Edit 800 rpm 9000 rpm 10 rpm 9000 rpm SO OEM

519 Maximum fan speed Edit 3000 rpm 9000 rpm 10 rpm 5830 rpm SO OEM

522 Ramp-up low-fire high-fire Edit 2.058 s 74.970 s 0.294 s 14,994 s SO OEM

523 Ramp-down high-fire low-fire Edit 2.058 s 74.970 s 0.294 s 14,994 s SO OEM

558 Mode: UDS status information 0 = PC tool mode 1 = PWM mode 2 = actuator mode 3 = internally 4 = internally 5 = internally

Read only 0 5 1 0 SO ---

559 PWM mode 0 = open loop control 1 = PID control 2 = safety mode (PWM limits)

Edit 0 2 1 1 SO OEM

560 Mode: Pneumatic ratio control 0 = OFF 1 = PWM fan 2 = air damper actuator

Read only 0 2 1 1 SO ---

Page 73: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

73/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 12 PME71.901... 29.11.2011

Parameter Parameter Edit Value range Resolution Factory setting Password level Password level number Min. Max. reading from level writing from level

600 Power setting

644 Number of pulses per revolution Edit 2 5 1 3 SO OEM

646 Settling time for assessment of speed Edit 1.029 s 2.058 s 0.147 s 2,058 s SO OEM

650.00 Speed tolerance band: Speed shutdown Edit 1% 5% 1% 1% SO OEM

650.01 Speed tolerance band: Quick speed shutdown Edit 1% 10% 1% 3% SO OEM

654 Analog input (feedback potentiometer ASZxx.3x required) 0 = 3-position step input 1 = 0...10 V 2 = 0...135 3 = 0...20 mA 4 = 4...20 mA with lockout at I <4 mA 5 = 4...20 mA

Edit 0 5 1 1 SO SO

658.00 PWM values fan: Start PWM Edit 1% 100% 1% 25% SO OEM

658.01 PWM values fan: Min. PWM operating range Edit 0% 20% 1% 0% SO OEM

658.02 PWM values fan: Max. PWM operating range Edit 80% 100% 1% 100% SO OEM

659.00 Ramp time of fan: Min. low-fire to high-fire Read only 0 s 74.970 s 0.294 s 2,058 s SO ---

659.01 Ramp time of fan: Max. low-fire to high-fire Read only 0 s 74,.70 s 0.294 s 74,970 s SO ---

659.02 Ramp time of fan: Min. high-fire to low-fire Read only 0 s 74.970 s 0.294 s 2,058 s SO ---

659.03 Ramp time of fan: Max. high-fire to low-fire Read only 0 s 74.970 s 0.294 s 74,970 s SO ---

660 Tolerance time speed deviation Read only 0 s 37.85 s 0.147 s 4,998 s SO ---

674 Neutral band (permitted control offset) Edit 0 rpm 255 rpm 1 rpm 40 rpm SO OEM

675.00 PWM: Min. PWM with prepurging, SEC Edit 0% 100% 1% 86% SO OEM

675.01 PWM: Max. PWM with ignition load, SEC Edit 0% 100% 1% 34% SO OEM

676 Gain factor speed control Read only 0 255 1 112 SO ---

677 Integral action time speed control Read only 0 s 37.485 s 0.147 s 0,441 s SO ---

678 Derivative action time speed control Read only 0 s 37.485 s 0.147 s 0 s SO ---

679.00 Time constant PT1 speed control: Lower speed range high-fire to low-fire

Edit 0 s 37.485 s 0.147 s 6,027 s SO OEM

679.01 Time constant PT1 speed control: Medium speed range high-fire to low-fire

Edit 0 s 37.485 s 0.147 s 6,027 s SO OEM

679.02 Time constant PT1 speed control: Upper speed range high-fire to low-fire

Edit 0 s 37.485 s 0.147 s 6,027 s SO OEM

679.03 Time constant PT1 speed control: Total speed range low-fire to high-fire

Edit 0 s 37.485 s 0.147 s 6,027 s SO OEM

680.00 Speed range for PT1 time constant: Threshold upper speed range Edit 800 rpm 9000 rpm 10 rpm 4000 rpm SO OEM

680.01 Speed range for PT1 time constant: Threshold lower speed range Edit 800 rpm 9000 rpm 10 rpm 2000 rpm SO OEM

Page 74: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

74/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 12 PME71.901... 29.11.2011

Parameter Parameter Edit Value range Resolution Factory setting Password level Password level

number Min. Max. reading from level writing from level

700 Error history

701.00 Current error: Error code Read only 2 255 1 --- Service ---

701.01 Current error: Startup meter reading Read only 0 999999 1 --- Service ---

701.02 Current error: MMI phase Read only --- --- --- --- Service ---

701.03 Current error: Power value Read only 0% 100% 1 --- Service ---

702.00 Error history former 1: Error code Read only 2 255 1 --- Service ---

702.01 Error history o1: Startup meter reading Read only 0 999999 1 --- Service ---

702.02 Error history o1: MMI phase Read only --- --- --- --- Service ---

702.03 Error history o1: Power value Read only 0% 100% 1 --- Service ---

711.00 Error history former 10: Error code Read only 2 255 1 --- Service ---

711.01 Error history former 10: Startup meter reading Read only 0 999999 1 --- Service ---

711.02 Error history former 10: MMI phase Read only --- --- --- --- Service ---

711.03 Error history former 10: Power value Read only 0% 100% 1 --- Service ---

900 Process data

920 Current PWM signal fan Read only 0% 100% 1% --- Service ---

936 Normalized speed Read only 0% 100% 0.01% --- Service ---

951 Mains voltage Read only 0 V LME71.000A1: 175 V

LME71.000A2: 350 V

1 V --- Service ---

954 Flame intensity Read only 0% 100% 1% --- Service ---

Page 75: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

75/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 13 PME72.521... 29.11.2011

13 PME72.521... 13.1 Program sequence PME72.521...

For connection diagram fuel trains (G)/(Gp1/1)

7105d72e/0611

M

Z

V1

V2

AL

K1X2-02 Pin 3

Act

uato

r p

ositi

on

High-fire

Cam V2

Ignition load / low-fire

CLOSE

R

LR-OPEN

LR-CLOSE

LP

Pmin

ION

Not active

X3-04 Pin 5

Relaycontact Function / inputs

Display and operation unit parameter number

LED permanent

LED flashing

tw t11 t10 t12 t3 t3n t4 t8

Standby Startup Operation Shutdown

t1 TSA

Relaycontact Function / outputs

SKX3-04 Pin 1

X5-03 Pin 1

X5-03 Pin 3

X65 Pin 1

X5-03 Pin 2

X65 Pin 1

X3-02 Pin 1

X5-01 Pin 2

X2-02 Pin 4

X9-04 Pin 2

K1X6-03 Pin 3

K4X2-01 Pin 3

K5X4-02 Pin 3

K7X7-04 Pin 4

X7-02 Pin 3

K2/1X2-03 Pin 3

Phase number 21 22 24 22 30 30 36 38 40 42 44 72 74 10 oP: P1 74

t11

POC

POC

Not active

Not active

Not active

SV

V2aX7-01 Pin 3

SA-NLK11X2-09 Pin 3

SA-KLK12X2-09 Pin 2

SA-ZX2-09 Pin 1

SA-RX2-09 Pin 4

Input from cam V2X2-09 Pin 8

Output from cam V2K2/2X2-09 Pin 7

t11 t12

Figure 26: Program sequence PME72.521... for connection diagram fuel trains (G)/Gp1/1)

Page 76: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

76/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 13 PME72.521... 29.11.2011

Phase number

Function

LOC Lockout shutdown phase

OFF Standby, waiting for heat request

oP:P1 Part 1: Request load controller OPEN Part 2: Switching point fuel valve 2a (2nd stage) ON by actuator Part 3: High-fire reached Part 4: Request load controller CLOSE Part 5: Switching point fuel valve 2a (2nd stage) OFF by actuator Part 6: Low-fire reached

10 Actuator travels to the CLOSED position, home run

21 Safety valve ON, air pressure switch in no-load position Check if POC is closed, actuator travels to the CLOSED position

22 Part 1: Fan motor ON Part 2: Specified time air pressure switch Message (timeout), stabilization of air pressure switch

24 Opening time of actuator (timeout)

30 Part 1: Prepurge time without flame simulation test Part 2: Prepurge time with flame simulation test (2.1 seconds)

36 Closing time of actuator (timeout)

38 Preignition time

40 Postignition time

42 Flame detection

44 Interval: End of ignition safety time and release of load controller

72 Opening time of actuator (timeout)

74 Part 1: Operation is ended Part 2: Postpurge time

90 Pressure switch-min open → safety shutdown

Key to phases

Page 77: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

77/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 13 PME72.521... 29.11.2011

13.2 Connection diagrams for fuel train applications (examples)

13.2.1 Gas direct ignition (G), 1-stage

SV

V1

Program G Gas direct 1-stage

X7-04

LME73.000...X7-01

Figure 27: Connection diagram fuel train gas direct ignition (G), 1-stage

13.2.2 Gas direct ignition 1 (Gp1/1), 2-stage

SV

V1

Program Gp1/1 Gas direct 1, 2-stage

V2a

X7-01 X7-04

LME72.000...

Figure 28: Connection diagram fuel train gas direct ignition 1 (Gp1/1), 2-stage

Page 78: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

78/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 13 PME72.521... 29.11.2011

13.3 Connection diagram for LME72.000... with actuator SQM4... (example 1)

Note: The connection diagram shown is merely an example which must be verified in the individual case depending on the application!

PME72.521... 1-/2-stage modulating Without pilot ignition Without valve proving

X3X2X1 12 3

VIV

III

5

M

III

VI

2134123 4 56

I

VIVIV

III

II

7105

d06

e/10

09

X2-09

SA

-ZS

A-K

LS

A-N

LS

A-R PE

Figure 29: Connection diagram for LME72.000... with actuator SQM4... (example 1)

Page 79: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

79/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 13 PME72.521... 29.11.2011

13.4 Connection diagram for LME72.000... without actuator SQM4...

Note: The connection diagram shown is merely an example which must be verified in the individual case depending on the application!

PME72.521... 1-stage Without actuator

With/without valve proving

X2-09

SA

-ZS

A-K

LS

A-N

LS

A-R PE

Inp

ut t

o ca

m V

2O

utp

ut t

o ca

m V

2

71

05d3

5e/1

00

9

Figure 30: Connection diagram for LME73.000... without actuator SQM4...

When using the LME72.000... without actuator according to application Gas direct

ignition (G), 1-stage or gas direct ignition 1 (G), 1-stage, with valve proving, wire link Dbr4 must be fitted to the actuator’s X2-09 as shown above

Parameter P515.01 must be set to 0

Page 80: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

80/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 13 PME72.521... 29.11.2011

13.5 Time table and settings for program sequence PME72.521... Type Times in seconds

PME72.521... tw TSA max.

t1 min.

t3 min.

t3n approx.

t4 min.

t8 min.

t10 approx.

t11 approx.

t12 approx.

1) 2) 3)

Requirement 2.5 3 30 6 2.5 9 15 15 300 300 --- --- ---

Factory setting --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

Max. 2.5 3 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- 1 0.45 0.45

Min. --- --- 30 6 --- 9 15 --- --- --- 0.3 0.3 ---

Step size --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

Legend tw Waiting time t4 Interval: End of safety time – load controller release TSA Safety time t8 Postpurge time t1 Prepurge time t10 Specified time air pressure switch state message (timeout) t3 Preignition time t11 Opening time of actuator (timeout) t3n Postignition time t12 Closing time of actuator (timeout) 1) Response time to a change of signal by the air pressure switch (opens) and response time in the event of loss of flame 2) Response time to a change of signal by the inputs (e.g. pressure switch-min) 3) Flame detection time

Page 81: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

81/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 13 PME72.521... 29.11.2011

13.6 LME72.000..: Inputs and outputs/internal connection diagram

Figure 31: LME72.000...: Inputs and outputs/internal connection diagram

Page 82: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

82/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 13 PME72.521... 29.11.2011

13.7 Parameter list PME72.521... (AZL2...)

Value range Parameter

number

Parameter Edit

Min. Max.

Resolution Factory setting Password level

reading from level

Password level

writing from level

000 Internal parameter

41 Heating engineer's password (4 characters) Edit xxxx xxxx --- --- --- OEM

42 OEM's password (5 characters) Edit xxxxx xxxxx --- --- --- OEM

60 Backup/restore Edit --- --- --- --- --- SO

100 General

102 Identification date Read only --- --- --- --- Info ---

103 Identification number Read only 0 9999 1 0 Info ---

113 Burner identification Edit x xxxxxxxx 1 --- Info SO

164 Number of startups resettable Resettable 0 999999 1 0 Info Info

166 Total number of startups Read only 0 999999 1 0 Info ---

170.00 Switching cycles actuator relay K12 Read only 0 999999 1 0 Info ---

170.01 Switching cycles actuator relay K11 Read only 0 999999 1 0 Info ---

170.02 Switching cycles actuator relay contact 2 Read only 0 999999 1 0 Info ---

170.03 Switching cycles actuator relay contact 1 Read only 0 999999 1 0 Info ---

171 Max. switching cycles actuator relay Read only 0 999999 1 0 Info ---

700 Error history

701 Current error:

00: Error code

01: Startup meter reading

02: MMI phase

03: Power value

Read only

2

0

---

0%

255

999999

---

100%

1

1

---

1

--- Service ---

702 Error history former 1:

00: Error code

01: Startup meter reading

02: MMI phase

03: Power value

Read only

2

0

---

0%

255

999999

---

100%

1

1

---

1

--- Service ---

711 Error history former 10:

00: Error code

01: Startup meter reading

02: MMI phase

03: Power value

Read only

2

0

---

0%

255

999999

---

100%

1

1

---

1

--- Service ---

Page 83: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

83/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 13 PME72.521... 29.11.2011

Value range Parameter

number

Parameter Edit

Min. Max.

Resolution Factory setting Password level

reading from level

Password level

writing from level

900 Process data

936 Normalized speed Read only 0% 100% 0.01% --- Service ---

951 Mains voltage Read only 0 V LME72.000A1: 175 V

LME72.000A2: 350 V

1 V --- Service ---

954 Flame intensity Read only 0% 100% 1% --- Service ---

Page 84: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

84/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 14 PME72.541... 29.11.2011

14 PME72.541... 14.1 Program sequence PME72.541...

For connection diagram fuel trains (G)/(Gp1/1)

7105d73e/0611

M

Z

PV

V1

AL

K1X2-02 Pin 3

Act

uato

r p

ositi

on

High-fire

Cam V2

Ignition load / low-fire

CLOSE

R

LR-OPEN

LR-CLOSE

LP

Pmin

ION

Not active

X3-04 Pin 5

Relaycontact Function / inputs

Display and operation unit parameter number

LED permanent

LED flashing

tw t11 t10 t12 t3 t3n t4 t8

Standby Startup Operation Shutdown

t1 TSA

Relaycontact Function / outputs

SKX3-04 Pin 1

X5-03 Pin 1

X5-03 Pin 3

X65 Pin 1

X5-03 Pin 2

X65 Pin 1

X3-02 Pin 1

X5-01 Pin 2

X2-02 Pin 4

X9-04 Pin 2

K1X6-03 Pin 3

K4X2-01 Pin 3

K5X4-02 Pin 3

K2/2X7-01 Pin 3

X7-04 Pin 4

K2/1X2-03 Pin 3

Phase number 21 22 24 22 30 30 36 38 40 42 44 72 74 10 oP: P1 74

t11

POC

POC

Not active

Not active

Not active

SV

V2X7-02 Pin 3

SA-NLK11X2-09 Pin 3

SA-KLK12X2-09 Pin 2

SA-ZX2-09 Pin 1

SA-RX2-09 Pin 4

Input Dbr3 for PVX2-09 Pin 8

Output Dbr3 for PVK2/2X2-09 Pin 3

t11 t12

50 50

t22

t9 t5

Figure 32: Program sequence PME72.541... for connection diagram fuel trains (G)/Gp1/1)

Page 85: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

85/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 14 PME72.541... 29.11.2011

Phase number

Function

LOC Lockout shutdown phase

OFF Standby, waiting for heat request

oP:P1 Part 1: Interval: Pilot valve OFF – release of load controller Part 2: Request load controller OPEN Part 3: Modulation of actuator toward high-fire Part 4: High-fire reached Part 5: Request load controller CLOSE Part 6: Modulation of actuator toward low-fire Part 7: Low-fire reached

10 Actuator travels to the CLOSED position, home run

21 Safety valve ON, air pressure switch in no-load position Check if POC is closed, actuator travels to the CLOSED position

22 Part 1: Fan motor ON Part 2: Specified time air pressure switch Message (timeout), stabilization of air pressure switch

24 Opening time of actuator (timeout)

30 Part 1: Prepurge time without flame simulation test Part 2: Prepurge time with flame simulation test (2.1 seconds)

36 Closing time of actuator (timeout)

38 Preignition time

40 Postignition time

42 Flame detection

44 Interval: End of ignition safety time and fuel valve 1 ON

50 Part 1: Interval: Fuel valve 1 ON and pilot valve OFF Part 2: Response time

72 Opening time of actuator (timeout)

74 Part 1: Operation is ended Part 2: Postpurge time

90 Pressure switch-min open → safety shutdown

Key to phases

Page 86: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

86/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 14 PME72.541... 29.11.2011

14.2 Connection diagrams for fuel train applications (examples)

14.2.1 Gas direct ignition (G), 1-stage

SV

V1

Program G Gas direct 1-stage

X7-04

LME72.000...X7-01

Figure 33: Connection diagram fuel train gas direct ignition (G), 1-stage

14.2.2 Gas pilot ignition 1 (Gp1/1), 1-stage

SV

V1

Program Gp1/1 Gas pilot 1-stage

PV

X7-01 X7-04

LME72.000...

Figure 34: Connection diagram fuel train gas pilot ignition 1 (Gp1/1), 1-stage

Page 87: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

87/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 14 PME72.541... 29.11.2011

14.3 Connection diagram for LME72.000... with actuator SQM4... (example 1)

Note: The connection diagram shown is merely an example which must be verified in the individual case depending on the application!

PME72.541... 1-stage modulating With pilot ignition Without valve proving

X3X2X1 12 3

VIV

III

5

M

III

VI

2134123 4 56

I

VIVIV

III

II

7105

d09

e/10

09

X2-09

SA

-ZS

A-K

LS

A-N

LS

A-R PE

Inp

ut P

VO

utp

ut P

V

Figure 35: Connection diagram for LME72.000... with actuator SQM4... (example 1)

Page 88: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

88/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 14 PME72.541... 29.11.2011

14.4 Connection diagram for LME72.000... without actuator SQM4...

Note: The connection diagram shown is merely an example which must be verified in the individual case depending on the application!

PME72.541... 1-stage With pilot ignition Without actuator

With/Without valve proving

X2-09

SA

-ZS

A-K

LS

A-N

LS

A-R PE

Inp

ut p

ilot

valv

e P

VO

utpu

t pi

lot

valv

e P

V

710

5d8

5e/1

111

Figure 36: Connection diagram for LME73.000... without actuator SQM4...

When using the LME72.000... without actuator according to application Gas direct

ignition (G), 1-stage or gas direct ignition 1 (G), 1-stage, with valve proving, wire link Dbr4 must be fitted to the actuator’s X2-09 as shown above

Parameter P515.01 must be set to 0

Page 89: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

89/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 14 PME72.541... 29.11.2011

14.5 Time table and settings for program sequence PME72.541...

Type Times in seconds

PME72.541... tw TSA max.

t1 min.

t3 min.

t3n approx.

t4 min.

t5 min.

t8 min.

t9 approx.

t10 approx.

t11 approx.

t12 approx.

t22 1) 2) 3)

Requirement 2.5 3 30 6 2.5 9 8.5 15 3 15 300 300 t9+1 --- --- ---

Factory setting --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

Max. 2.5 3 --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- 1 0.45 0.45

Min. --- --- 30 6 --- 9 8.5 15 --- --- --- --- --- 0.3 0.3 ---

Step size --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---

Legend tw Waiting time t8 Postpurge time TSA Safety time t9 Interval: Fuel valve 1 ON - pilot valve OFF t1 Prepurge time t10 Specified time air pressure switch state message (timeout) t3 Preignition time t11 Opening time of actuator (timeout) t3n Postignition time t12 Closing time of actuator (timeout) t4 Interval: End of safety time - fuel valve 1 ON t22 2nd safety time t5 Interval: Pilot valve OFF - load controller release 1) Response time to a change of signal by the air pressure switch (opens) and response time in the event of loss of flame 2) Response time to a change of signal by the inputs (e.g. pressure switch-min) 3) Flame detection time

Page 90: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

90/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 14 PME72.541... 29.11.2011

14.6 LME72.000..: Inputs and outputs/internal connection diagram

Figure 37: LME72.000...: Inputs and outputs/internal connection diagram

Page 91: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

91/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 14 PME72.541... 29.11.2011

14.7 Parameter list PME72.541... (AZL2...)

Value range Parameter

number

Parameter Edit

Min. Max.

Resolution Factory setting Password level

reading from level

Password level

writing from level

000 Interne Parameter

41 Heating engineer's password (4 characters) Edit xxxx xxxx --- --- --- OEM

42 OEM's password (5 characters) Edit xxxxx xxxxx --- --- --- OEM

60 Backup/restore Edit Restore Backup --- --- --- SO

100 General

102 Identification date Read only --- --- --- --- Info ---

103 Identification number Read only 0 9999 1 0 Info ---

113 Burner identification Edit x xxxxxxxx 1 --- Info SO

164 Number of startups resettable Resettable 0 999999 1 0 Info Info

166 Total number of startups Read only 0 999999 1 0 Info ---

170.00 Switching cycles actuator relay K12 Read only 0 999999 1 0 Info ---

170.01 Switching cycles actuator relay K11 Read only 0 999999 1 0 Info ---

170.02 Switching cycles actuator relay contact 2 Read only 0 999999 1 0 Info ---

170.03 Switching cycles actuator relay contact 1 Read only 0 999999 1 0 Info ---

171 Max. switching cycles actuator relay Read only 0 999999 1 0 Info ---

Page 92: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

92/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 14 PME72.541... 29.11.2011

Value range Parameter

number

Parameter Edit

Min. Max.

Resolution Factory setting Password level

reading from level

Password level

writing from level

700 Error history

701 Current error:

00: Error code

01: Startup meter reading

02: MMI phase

03: Power value

Read only

2

0

---

0%

255

999999

---

100%

1

1

---

1

--- Service ---

702 Error history former 1:

00: Error code

01: Startup meter reading

02: MMI phase

03: Power value

Read only

2

0

---

0%

255

999999

---

100%

1

1

---

1

--- Service ---

711 Error history former 10:

00: Error code

01: Startup meter reading

02: MMI phase

03: Power value

Read only

2

0

---

0%

255

999999

---

100%

1

1

---

1

--- Service ---

900 Process data

936 Normalized speed Read only 0% 100% 0.01% --- Service ---

951 Mains voltage Read only 0 V LME72.000A1: 175 V

LME72.000A2: 350 V

1 V --- Service ---

954 Flame intensity Read only 0% 100% 1% --- Service ---

Page 93: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

93/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 15 PME73.810... 29.11.2011

15 PME73.810... 15.1 Program sequence PME73.810...

For connection diagram fuel train (G) without valve proving For connection diagram fuel train (G) with valve proving For connection diagram actuator application example 1

7105d74e/1111

M

Z

V1

V2a

AL

K1X2-02 Pin 3

Act

uato

r p

ositi

on

High-fire

Cam V2

Ignition load / low-fire

CLOSE

R

LR-AUF

LR-ZU

LP

Pmin

P LT

ION / QRA

Not active

X3-04 Pin 5

Relaycontact Function / inputs

Display and operation unit parameter number

LED permanent

LED flashing

tw t11 t10 t12 t3 t3n t4 t8 td4 td1 td3 td2

Standby Startup Operation Shutdown Valve proving

setzung If parameter P241 =1 (ON)

Can be parameterized

t1 TSA

259 225 260 226 257 234

Relaycontact Function / outputs

SKX3-04 Pin 1

X5-03 Pin 1

X5-03 Pin 3

X65 Pin 1

X5-03 Pin 2

X65 Pin 1

X3-02 Pin 1

X5-01 Pin 2

X2-02 Pin 4

X9-04 Pin 2

K1X6-03 Pin 3

K4X2-01 Pin 3

K5X4-02 Pin 3

K7X7-04 Pin 4

X7-01 Pin 3

K2/1X2-03 Pin 3

Phase number 21 22 24 22 30 30 36 38 40 42 44 72 74 10 80 81 82 83 oP: xx (Istleistung in %) 74

224

t11

POC

POC

240 240 240 240 240 240 242 243 244 245

t11 t12

SV

V2K9X7-02 Pin 3

SA-KLK12X2-09 Pin 2

SA-NLK11X2-09 Pin 3

SA-ZX2-09 Pin 1

SA-RX2-09 Pin 4

Input from cam V2X2-09 Pin 8

Output from cam V2X2-09 Pin 7 K2/2

*) *) *) *)*)

*1

*2

Figure 38: Program sequence PME73.810... for connection diagram fuel train (G) *) During the actuator running phases, the actuator feedback signal must be OFF first, then ON. *1 Valve proving when P241 = 1 after mains ON, lockout or P234 (postpurge time t8) = 0 seconds *2 Valve proving when P241 = 1 and P234 (postpurge time t8) >0 seconds

Page 94: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

94/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 15 PME73.810... 29.11.2011

Phase number

Function

LOC Lockout shutdown phase

OFF Standby, waiting for heat request

oP Part 1: Request load controller OPEN Part 2: Switching point fuel valve 2a (2nd stage) ON by actuator Part 3: High-fire reached Part 4: Request losf controller CLOSE Part 5: Switching point fuel valve 2a (2nd stage) OFF by actuator Part 6: Low-fire eached

10 Actuator travels to the CLOSED position, home run

21 Safety valve ON, air pressure switch in no-load position Check if POC is closed, actuator travels to the CLOSED position

22 Part 1: Fan motor ON Part 2: Specified time air pressure switch Message (timeout), stabilization of air pressure switch

24 Opening time of actuator (timeout)

30 Part 1: Prepurge time without flame simulation test Valve proving when… parameter 241 = 1 after power ON lockout, or parameter 234 (postpurge time) = 0 seconds Part 2: Prepurge time with flame simulation test (2.1 seconds)

36 Closing time of actuator (timeout)

38 Preignition time

40 Postignition time, parameter 257 + 0.3 seconds

42 Flame detection

44 Interval: End of ignition safety time and release of load controller

72 Opening time of actuator (timeout)

74 Part 1: Operation is ended, check if postpurging is programmed Part 2: Postpurge time Valve proving when… parameter 241 = 1, and parameter 234 (postpurge time) >0 seconds

80 Test space is evacuated

81 Atmospheric pressure test

82 Test space is filled

83 Gas pressure test

90 Pressure switch-min open → safety shutdown

*) During the actuator’s running phases, the actuator’s feedback signal must firbe OFF, then ON

*1 Valve proving when P241 = 1 after mains ON, lockout or P234 (postpurge time) = 0 seconds

*2 Valve proving when P241 = 1 and P234 (postpurge time) >0 seconds

Key to phases

Page 95: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

95/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 15 PME73.810... 29.11.2011

15.2 Connection diagrams for fuel train applications (examples)

15.2.1 Gas direct ignition (G), 1-stage

SV

V1

Program G Gas direct 1-stage

X7-04

LME73.000...X7-01

Figure 39: Connection diagram fuel train gas direct ignition (G), 1-stage

15.2.2 Gas direct ignition (G), 2-stage

SV

V1

Program G Gas direct 2-stage

X7-01 X7-04

LME73.000...

V2a

Figure 40: Connection diagram fuel train gas direct ignition (G), 2-stage

Page 96: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

96/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 15 PME73.810... 29.11.2011

15.2.3 Gas direct ignition (G), 1-stage, with valve proving

SV V1

Program G Gas direct 1-stage, with valve proving

X7-04

LME73.000...

V2X7-02

Figure 41: Connection diagram fuel train gas direct ignition (G), 1-stage, with valve proving

15.2.4 Gas direct ignition (G), 2-stage, with valve proving

SV V1

Program G Gas direct 2-stage, with valve proving

X7-01LME73.000...

V2a

V2X7-02 X7-04

Figure 42: Connection diagram fuel train gas direct ignition (G), 2-stage, with valve proving

Note: When valve proving is activated (e.g. on shutdown), the load on the valve’s terminals (according to chapter Technical data/Terminal rating Outputs) is restricted. Fuel valve 1 X7-04 pin 4/fuel valve 2 X7-02 pin 3/auxiliary output Rated voltage AC 120 V AC 230 V

50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz Rated current 1 A 1 A Power factor cos >0.4 cos >0.4 If the terminal load (according to chapter Technical data/Terminal rating Outputs) is not reduced (max. rated current 2 A, cos >0.4), the design lifetime will be reached after about 100,000 burner startup cycles!

Page 97: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

97/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 15 PME73.810... 29.11.2011

15.2.5 Gas valve proving Valve proving is dependent on parameter 241. It is employed to detect leaking gas valves and, if necessary, to prevent the valves from opening or ignition from being switched on. Lockout is initiated. Valve proving with separate pressure switch

Step 1: td4 – test space evacuating. Gas valve on the burner side is opened to bring the test space to atmospheric pressure. Step 2: td1 – test atmospheric pressure. When the gas valve has closed, the gas pressure in the test space must not exceed a certain level. Step 3: td3 – test space filling. Gas valve on the mains side opens to fill the test space. Step 4: td2 – test gas pressure. When the gas valve has closed, the gas pressure in the test space must not drop below a certain level. Legend td1 Test atmospheric pressure td2 Test gas pressure td3 Test space filling td4 Test space evacuating V… Fuel valve P LT Pressure switch valve proving

Input/output signal 1 (ON)

Input/output signal 0 (OFF)

P LT

7105d68e/1210

PLT

Fig. 43: Valve proving with separat pressure switch

Input permissible signal 1 (ON) or 0 (OFF) Valve proving can be parameterized to take place on startup, shutdown, or both. Recommendation: Perform valve proving on shutdown.

No. Parameter 241.00 Valve proving

0 = OFF 1 = ON ¹)

242 Valve proving test space evacuating 243 Valve proving time test atmospheric pressure 244 Valve proving test space filling 245 Valve proving time test gas pressure

¹) Valve proving during postpurging, if P234 >0 (postpurge time) and P241.01 = 1

Note! If valve proving is parameterized to take place on startup and shutdown, the gas valves must run through additional switching cycles. As a result, strain (wear) on the gas valves and the relay increases.

Page 98: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

98/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 15 PME73.810... 29.11.2011

Warning! The OEM must set the evacuation, filling and test times for atmospheric or mains pressure on every plant in compliance with the requirements of EN 1643. If not observed, there is a risk of impairment of safety functions.

It must be ensured that the 2 test times are correctly set. It is to be checked whether the gas required for the test may be fed into the combustion chamber (on the relevant application). The test times are safety-related. After a reset and in the case of aborted or prevented valve proving, the unit will perform valve proving the next time it is started up (only when valve proving is activated). In the case of valve proving, prepurging is active during the startup phase, even if it has been deactivated. Examples of aborted valve proving: When the safety loop or the start prevention input for gas (containing pressure switch-min) opens during valve proving. Valve proving – calculation of leakage rate (PG - Pw) • V • 3600

tTest =

Patm • QLeck QLeck in l/h Leakage rate in liters per hour

PG in mbar Overpressure between the valves at the beginning of the test phase

PW in mbar Overpressure set on the pressure switch (normally 50%

of the gas inlet pressure)

Patm in mbar Absolute air pressure (1013 mbar normal pressure)

V in l Volume between the valves (test volume) including valve volume

and pilot pipe, if present (Gp1 mod)

tTest in s Test time

Page 99: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

99/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 15 PME73.810... 29.11.2011

15.3 Connection diagram for LME73.000... with actuator SQM4... (example 1)

Note: The connection diagram shown is merely an example which must be verified in the individual case depending on the application!

PME73.810... 1-/2-stage modulating Without pilot ignition With/without valve proving

X3X2X1 12 3

VIV

III

5

M

III

VI

2134123 4 56

I

VIVIV

III

II

7105

d11e

/100

9

X2-09

SA

-ZS

A-K

LS

A-N

LS

A-R PE

Inp

ut o

f cam

V2

Out

put

of c

am V

2

X66

ASZ12.33

a b c

Terminal X66on LME73.000...

Type

SQNx1...SQMx1...SQNx0...SQMx0...

2 (Sig

nal)

3 (GN

D)

a b ca b c

abcabc

Terminal potentiometer(1 kOhm conductiveplastic 90°) ASZxx30

Rotation direction

Clo

ckw

ise

Co

un

ter-

cloc

kwis

e

XX

XX

------

------

Figure 44: Connection diagram for LME73.000... with actuator SQM4... (example 1)

Page 100: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

100/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 15 PME73.810... 29.11.2011

15.4 Time table and settings for program sequence PME73.810... Type Times in seconds

PME73.810... tw TSA max.

t1 P225

4) min.

t3 P226min.

t3n P257

approx.

t4 P230min.

t8 P234

5) min.

t10 P224

approx.

t11 P259

approx.

t12 P260

approx. 1) 2) 3)

td1 td2 min.

td3 td4

max.

Requirement 2.5 3 30 6 2.5 9 15 15 300 300 --- --- --- 10 3 Factory setting --- t3n+0.45 29.106+2.1 6.174 2.205+0.3 9.408 19.404 13.818 300.762 300.762 --- --- --- 10.29 2.646

Max. 2.5 14 1237+2.1 37.485 13.23+0.3 74.97 1237 13.818 1237 1237 1 0.45 0.45 37.485 2.646 Min. --- --- 0+2.1 1.029 0+0.3 3.234 0 0 0 0 0.3 0.3 --- 1.029 0

Step size --- --- 4.851 0.147 0.147 0.294 4.851 0.294 4.851 4.851 --- --- --- 0.147 0.147 Function parameter Parameter number Factory setting Repetition in the event of lost of flame during operation <2: None = 2: 1 x

P240 0

Valve proving 0: Inactive 1: Active

P241.00 1

Valve proving 0: During prepurge time 1: During postpurge time

P241.01 1

Valve proving 0: According to P241.01 1: During prepurge time and postpurge time

P241.02 0

Actuator position during prepurge time and postpurge time 0: Purging in low-fire 1: Purging in high-fire

P515 1

Legend tw Waiting time t10 Specified time air pressure switch state message (timeout) TSA Safety time t11 Opening time of actuator (timeout) t1 Prepurge time t12 Closing time of actuator (timeout) t3 Preignition time t3n Postignition time (P257 +0.3 seconds) td1 Test atmospheric pressure t4 Interval: End safety time - load controller release td2 Test gas pressure t8 Postpurge time td3 Test space filling td4 Test space evacuating 1) Response time to a change of signal by the air pressure switch (opens) and response time in the event of loss of flame 2) Response time to a change of signal by the inputs (e.g. pressure switch-min) 3) Flame detection time 4) Minimum time td1 + td2 + td3 + td4 if: Parameter P241.00 = 1 (ON, after mains ON, with lockout, P234 (postpurge time) = 0 (postpurging) or P241.01 = 0 5) Minimum time td1 + td2 + td3 + td4 if: Parameter P241.00 = 1 (ON) and P234 (postpurge time) >0 (postpurging) and P241.01 = 1

Page 101: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

101/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 15 PME73.810... 29.11.2011

15.5 LME73.000...: Inputs and outputs/internal connection diagram

Figure 45: LME73.000...: Inputs and outputs/internal connection diagram

Page 102: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

102/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 15 PME73.810... 29.11.2011

15.6 Parameter list PME73.810... (AZL2...)

Value range Parameter

number

Parameter Edit

Min. Max.

Resolution Factory setting Password level

reading from level

Password level

writing from level

000 Internal parameter

41 Heating engineer's password (4 characters) Edit xxxx xxxx --- --- --- OEM

42 OEM's password (5 characters) Edit xxxxx xxxxx --- --- --- OEM

60 Backup/restore Edit Restore Backup --- --- --- SO

100 General

102 Identification date Read only --- --- --- --- Info ---

103 Identification number Read only 0 9999 1 0 Info ---

113 Burner identification Edit x xxxxxxxx 1 burnErId Info SO

123 Min. power control step Edit 1% 10% 0.1 2 SO SO

140 Mode display of display and operating unit AZL2...

1 = standard (program phase)

2 = flame 1 (QRA.../ION)

3 = flame 2 (QRB.../QRC...) not used

4 = active power (power value)

Edit 1 4 1 4 SO SO

164 Numbers of startups resettable Resettable 0 999999 1 0 Info Info

166 Total number of startups Read only 0 999999 1 0 Info ---

170.00 Switching cycles actuator relay K12 Read only 0 999999 1 0 Info ---

170.01 Switching cycles actuator relay K11 Read only 0 999999 1 0 Info ---

170.02 Switching cycles actuator relay contact 2 Read only 0 999999 1 0 Info ---

170.03 Switching cycles actuator relay contact 1 Read only 0 999999 1 0 Info ---

171 Max. switching cycles actuator relay Read only 0 999999 1 0 Info ---

Page 103: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

103/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 15 PME73.810... 29.11.2011

Value range Parameter-

number

Parameter Edit

Min. Max.

Resolution Factory setting Password level

reading from level

Password level

writing from level

200 Burner control

224 Special time air pressure switch Edit 0 s 13.818 s 0.294 s 13.818 s SO OEM 225 Prepurge time -2,1 seconds Edit 0 s 1237 s 4.851 s 29.106 s SO OEM 226 Preignition time Edit 1.029 s 37.485 s 0.147 s 6.174 s SO OEM 230 Interval: End of safety time - load controller release Edit 3.234 s 74.97 s 0.294 s 9.408 s SO OEM 234 Postpurge time Edit 0 s 1237 s 4.851 s 19.404 s SO OEM 240 Repetition in the event of loss of flame during operation

0 = none

1 = none

2 = 1 x Repetition

Edit 0 2 1 0 SO OEM

241.00 Valve proving

0 = OFF

1 = ON

Edit 0 1 1 1 SO OEM

241.01 Valve proving

0 = during prepurge time

1 = during postpurge time

Edit 0 1 1 1 SO OEM

241.02 Valve proving

0 = according to P241.01

1 = during prepurge time and postpurge time

Edit 0 1 1 0 SO OEM

242 Valve proving test space evacuating Edit 0 s 2.648 s 0.147 s 2.648 s SO OEM 243 Valve proving time test atmospheric pressure Edit 1.029 s 37.485 s 0.147 s 10.290 s SO OEM 244 Valve proving test space filling Edit 0 s 2.648 s 0.147 s 2.648 s SO OEM 245 Valve proving time test gas pressure Edit 1.029 s 37.485 s 0.147 s 10.290 s SO OEM 257 Postignition time -0.3 seconds Edit 0 s 13.23 s 0.147 s 2.205 s SO OEM 259 Opening time of actuator (timeout) Edit 0 s 1237 s 4.851 s 300.762 s SO OEM

260 Closing time of actuator (timeout) Edit 0 s 1237 s 4.851 s 300.762 s SO OEM 515 Actuator position during prepurge time and postpurge time

0: Purging in low-fire 1: Purging in high-fire

Edit 0 1 1 1 SO OEM

Page 104: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

104/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 15 PME73.810... 29.11.2011

Parameter Parameter Edit Value range Resolution Factory setting Password level Password level

number Min. Max. reading from level writing from level

600 Power setting

654 Analog input (feedback potentiometer ASZxx.3x required)

0 = 3-position step input

1 = 0...10 V

2 = 0...135

3 = 0...20 mA

4 = 4...20 mA with lockout at I <4 mA

5 = 4...20 mA

Edit 0 5 1 1 SO SO

700 Error history

701 Current error:

00: Error code

01: Startup meter reading

02: MMI phase

03: Power value

Read only

2

0

---

0%

255

999999

---

100%

1

1

---

1

--- Service ---

702 Error history former 1:

00: Error code

01: Startup meter reading

02: MMI phase

03: Power value

Read only

2

0

---

0%

255

999999

---

100%

1

1

---

1

--- Service ---

711 Error history former 10:

00: Error code

01: Startup meter reading

02: MMI phase

03: Power value

Read only

2

0

---

0%

255

999999

---

100%

1

1

---

1

--- Service ---

900 Process data

936 Normalized speed Read only 0% 100% 0.01% --- Service ---

951 Mains voltage Read only 0 V LME73.000A1: 175 V

LME73.000A2: 350 V

1 V --- Service ---

954 Flame intensity Read only 0% 100% 1% --- Service ---

Page 105: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

105/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 16 PME73.820... 29.11.2011

16 PME73.820... 16.1 Program sequence PME73.820...

For connection diagram fuel train (G)

7105d75e/1111

M

Z

V1

V2a

AL

K1X2-02 Pin 3

Act

uato

r p

ositi

on

High-fire

Cam V2

Ignition load / low-fire

CLOSE

R

LR-OPEN

LR-CLOSE

LP

Pmin

P LT

ION / QRA

Not active

X3-04 Pin 5

Relaycontact Function / inputs

Display and operating unit parameter number

LED permanent

LED flashing

tw t11 t10 t12 t3 t3n t4 t8 td4 td1 td3 td2

Standby Startup Operation Shutdown Valve proving

If parameter P241.00 =1 (ON)

Can be parameterized

t1 TSA

259 225 260 226 257 234

Relaycontact Function / outputs

SKX3-04 Pin 1

X5-03 Pin 1

X5-03 Pin 3

X65 Pin 1

X5-03 Pin 2

X65 Pin 1

X3-02 Pin 1

X5-01 Pin 2

X2-02 Pin 4

X9-04 Pin 2

K1X6-03 Pin 3

K4X2-01 Pin 3

K5X4-02 Pin 3

K7X7-04 Pin 4

X7-01 Pin 3

K2/1X2-03 Pin 3

21 22 24 22 30 30 36 38 40 42 44 72 74 10 80 81 82 83 oP1 74

224

t11

POC

POC

240 240 240 240 240 240 242 243 244 245

t11 t12

SV

V2K9X7-02 Pin3

SA-KLK12X2-09 Pin 2

SA-NLK11X2-09 Pin 3

SA-ZX2-09 Pin 1

SA-RX2-09 Pin 4

Input from cam V2X2-09 Pin 8

Output from cam V2X2-09 Pin 7 K2/2

*) *) *) *)

Phase number AZL2...

Phase number 7 segment in the LME...

21 22 24 22 30 30 36 38 40 42 44 72 74 10 80 81 82 83 oP:P1 74

230

Not active

Not active

*)

*1

*2

Figure 46: Program sequence PME73.820... for connection diagram fuel train (G)

*) During the actuator running phases, the actuator feedback signal must be OFF first, then ON.

*1 Valve proving, if P241.00 = 1 after mains ON, lockout, P234 (postpurge time t8) P241.01 = 0 second or

*2 Valve proving, if P241.00 = 1 and P234 (postpurge time t8) >0 second and P241.01 = 1

Page 106: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

106/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 16 PME73.820... 29.11.2011

Phase number

Function

LOC Lockout shutdown phase

OFF Standby, waiting for heat request

oP1/oP:P1 Part 1: Request load controller OPEN Part 2: Switching point fuel valve 2a (2nd stage) ON by actuator Part 3: High-fire reached Part 4: Request load controller CLOSE Part 5: Switching point fuel valve 2a (2nd stage) OFF by actuator Part 6: Low-flame reached

10 Actuator travels to the CLOSED position, home run

21 Safety valve ON, air pressure switch in no-load position Check if POC is closed, actuator travels to the CLOSED position

22 Part 1: Fan motor ON Part 2: Specified time air pressure switch Message (timeout), stabilization of air pressure switch

24 Opening time of actuator (timeout)

30 Part 1: Prepurge time without flame simulation test Valve proving when… parameter 241.00 = 1 after power ON, lockout, or parameter 234 (postpurge time) = 0 second or parameter 241.01 = 1 Part 2: Prepurge time with flame simulation test (2.1 seconds)

36 Closing time of actuator (timeout)

38 Preignition time

40 Postignition time, parameter 257 + 0.3 seconds

42 Flame detection

44 Interval: End of ignition safety time and release of load controller

72 Opening time of actuator (timeout)

74 Part 1: Operation is ended, check if postpurging is programmed Part 2: Postpurge time Valve proving when… parameter 241.00 = 1, and parameter 234 (postpurge time) >0 seconds, and parameter 241.01 = 1

80 Test space is evacuated

81 Atmospheric pressure test

82 Test space is filled

83 Gas pressure test

90 Pressure switch-min open → safety shutdown

*) During the actuator’s running phases, the actuator’s feedback signal must first be OFF, then ON

*1 Valve proving, if P241.00 = 1 after mains ON, lockout, P234 (postpurge time) P241.01 = 0 second

*2 Valve proving, if P241.00 = 1 and P234 (postpurge time) >0 second

Key to phases

Page 107: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

107/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 16 PME73.820... 29.11.2011

16.2 Connection diagrams for fuel train applications (examples)

16.2.1 Gas direct ignition (G), 1-stage

SV

V1

Program G Gas direct, 1-stage

X7-04

LME73.000...

Figure 47: Connection diagram fuel train gas direct ignition (G), 1-stage

16.2.2 Gas direct ignition 1 (G), 2-stage

SV

V1

Program G Gas direct 1, 2-stage

X7-01 X7-04

LME73.000...

V2a

Figure 48: Connection diagram fuel train gas direct ignition 1 (G), 2-stage

Page 108: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

108/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 16 PME73.820... 29.11.2011

16.2.3 Gas direct ignition 1 (G), 1-stage, with valve proving

SV V1

Program G Gas direct 1-stage, with valve proving

X7-04

LME73.000...

V2X7-02

Figure 49: Connection diagram fuel train gas direct ignition 1 (G), 1-stage, with valve proving

16.2.4 Gas direct ignition (G), 2-stage, with valve proving

SV V1

Program G Gas direct 2-stage, with valve proving

X7-01LME73.000...

V2a

V2X7-02 X7-04

Figure 50: Connection diagram fuel train gas direct ignition (G), 2-stage, with valve proving

Note: When valve proving is activated (e.g. on shutdown), the load on the valve’s terminals (according to chapter Technical data/Terminal rating Outputs) is restricted. Fuel valve 1 X7-04 pin 4/fuel valve 2 X7-02 pin 3/auxiliary output AUX Rated voltage AC 120 V AC 230 V

50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz Rated current 1 A 1 A Power factor cos >0.4 cos >0.4 If the terminal load (according to chapter Technical data/Terminal rating Outputs) is not reduced (max. rated current 2 A, cos >0.4), the design lifetime will be reached after about 100,000 burner startup cycles!

Page 109: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

109/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 16 PME73.820... 29.11.2011

16.2.5 Gas valve proving Valve proving is dependent on parameter 241. It is employed to detect leaking gas valves and, if necessary, to prevent the valves from opening or ignition from being switched on. Lockout is initiated. Valve proving with separate pressure switch

Step 1: td4 – test space evacuating. Gas valve on the burner side is opened to bring the test space to atmospheric pressure. Step 2: td1 – test atmospheric pressure. When the gas valve has closed, the gas pressure in the test space must not exceed a certain level. Step 3: td3 – test space filling. Gas valve on the mains side opens to fill the test space. Step 4: td2 – test gas pressure. When the gas valve has closed, the gas pressure in the test space must not drop below a certain level. Legend td1 Test atmospheric pressure td2 Test gas pressure td3 Test space filling td4 Test space evacuating V… Fuel valve P LT Pressure switch valve proving

Input/output signal 1 (ON)

Input/output signal 0 (OFF)

P LT

7105d68e/1210

PLT

Figure 51: Valve proving with separate pressure switch

Input permissible signal 1 (ON) or 0 (OFF) Valve proving can be parameterized to take place on startup, shutdown, or both. Recommendation: Perform valve proving on shutdown.

No. Parameter 241.00 Valve proving

0 = OFF 1 = ON ¹)

242 Valve proving test space evacuating 243 Valve proving time test atmospheric pressure 244 Valve proving test space filling 245 Valve proving time test gas pressure

¹) Valve proving during postpurging, if P234 >0 (postpurge time) and P241.01 = 1

Note! If valve proving is parameterized to take place on startup and shutdown, the gas valves must run through additional switching cycles. As a result, strain (wear) on the gas valves and the relay increases.

Page 110: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

110/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 16 PME73.820... 29.11.2011

Warning! The OEM must set the evacuation, filling and test times for atmospheric or mains pressure on every plant in compliance with the requirements of EN 1643. If not observed, there is a risk of impairment of safety functions.

It must be ensured that the 2 test times are correctly set. It is to be checked whether the gas required for the test may be fed into the combustion chamber (on the relevant application). The test times are safety-related. After a reset and in the case of aborted or prevented valve proving, the unit will perform valve proving the next time it is started up (only when valve proving is activated). In the case of valve proving, prepurging is active during the startup phase, even if it has been deactivated. Examples of aborted valve proving: When the safety loop or the start prevention input for gas (containing pressure switch-min) opens during valve proving. Valve proving – calculation of leakage rate (PG - Pw) • V • 3600

tTest =

Patm • QLeck QLeck in l/h Leakage rate in liters per hour

PG in mbar Overpressure between the valves at the beginning of the test phase

PW in mbar Overpressure set on the pressure switch (normally 50%

of the gas inlet pressure)

Patm in mbar Absolute air pressure (1013 mbar normal pressure)

V in l Volume between the valves (test volume) including valve volume

and pilot pipe, if present (Gp1 mod)

tTest in s Test time

Page 111: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

111/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 16 PME73.820... 29.11.2011

16.3 Connection diagram for LME73.000... with actuator SQM4... (example 1)

Note: The connection diagram shown is merely an example which must be verified in the individual case depending on the application!

PME73.820... 1-/2-stage modulating Without pilot ignition With/without valve proving

X3X2X1 12 3

VIV

III

5

M

III

VI

2134123 4 56

I

VIVIV

III

II

7105

d15

e/10

09

X2-09

SA

-ZS

A-K

LS

A-N

LS

A-R PE

Inp

ut to

cam

V2

Out

put

to

cam

V2

Figure 52: Connection diagram for LME73.000... with actuator SQM4... (example 1)

Page 112: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

112/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 16 PME73.820... 29.11.2011

16.4 Connection diagram for LME73.000... without actuator SQM4...

Note: The connection diagram shown is merely an example which must be verified in the individual case depending on the application!

PME73.820... 1-stage Without actuator

With/without valve proving

X2-09

SA

-ZS

A-K

LS

A-N

LS

A-R PE

Inp

ut t

o ca

m V

2O

utp

ut t

o ca

m V

2

71

05d3

5e/1

00

9

Figure 53: Connection diagram for LME73.000... without actuator SQM4...

When using the LME73.000... without actuator according to application Gas direct

ignition (G), 1-stage, gas direct ignition 1 (G), 1-stage, with valve proving, wire link Dbr4 must be fitted to the actuator’s X2-09 as shown above

Parameter P515.01 must be set to 0

Page 113: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

113/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 16 PME73.820... 29.11.2011

16.5 Time tables and settings for program sequence PME73.820... Type Times in seconds

PME73.820... tw TSA max.

t1 P225

4) min.

t3 P226 min.

t3n P257

approx.

t4 P230min.

t8 P234

5) min.

t10 P224

approx.

t11 P259

approx.

t12 P260

approx. 1) 2) 3)

td1 td2 min.

td3 td4

max.

Requirements 2.5 3 30 6 2.5 9 15 15 300 300 --- --- --- 10 3 Factory setting --- t3n+0.45 29.106+2.1 6.174 2.205+0.3 9.408 19.404 13.818 300.762 300.762 --- --- --- 10.29 2.646

Max. 2.5 14 1237+2.1 37.485 13.23+0.3 74.97 1237 13.818 1237 1237 1 0.45 0.45 37.485 2.646 Min. --- --- 0+2.1 1.029 0+0.3 3.234 0 0 0 0 0.3 0.3 --- 1.029 0

Step size --- --- 4.851 0.147 0.147 0.294 4.851 0.294 4.851 4.851 --- --- --- 0.147 0.147 Function parameter Parameter number Factory setting Repetition in the event of loss of flame during operation <2: None = 2: 1 x

P240 0

Valve proving 0: Inactive 1: active

P241.00 1

Valve proving 0: During prepurge time 1: During postpurge time

P241.01 1

Valve proving 0: According to P241.01 1: During prepurge time and postpurge time

P241.02 0

Actuator position during prepurge time and postpurge time 0: Purging in low-fire 1: Purging in high-fire

P515.00 1

Application with/without actuator 0: Without actuator 1: With actuator

P515.01 1

Legend tw Waiting time t10 Specified time air pressure switch state message (timeout) TSA Safety time t11 Opening time of actuator (timeout) t1 Prepurge time t12 Closing time of actuator (timeout) t3 Preignition time td1 Test atmospheric pressure t3n Postignition time (P257 +0.3 seconds) td2 Test gas pressure t4 Interval: End of safety time - load controller release td3 Test space filling t8 Postpurge time td4 Test space evacuating 1) Response time to a change of signal by the air pressure switch (opens) and response time in the event of loss of flame 2) Response time to a change of signal by the inputs (e.g. pressure switch-min) 3) Flame detection time 4) Minimum time td1 + td2 + td3 + td4 if: Parameter P241.00 = 1 (ON), after mains ON, with lockout, P234 (postpurge time) = 0 (postpurging) or P241.01 = 0 5) Minimum time td1 + td2 + td3 + td4 if: Parameter P241.00 = 1 (ON) and P234 (postpurge time) >0 (postpurging) and P241.01 = 1

Page 114: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

114/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 16 PME73.820... 29.11.2011

16.6 LME73.000...: Inputs and outputs/internal connection diagram

Figure 54: LM73.000...: Inputs and outputs/internal connection diagram

Page 115: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

115/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 16 PME73.820... 29.11.2011

16.7 Parameter list PME73.820... (AZL2...) Parameter Parameter Edit Value range Resolution Factory setting Password level Password level

number Min. Max. reading from level writing from level

000 Internal parameter

41 Heating engineer's password (4 characters) Edit xxxx xxxx --- --- --- OEM

42 OEM's password (5 characters) Edit xxxxx xxxxx --- --- --- OEM

60 Backup/restore Edit Restore Backup --- --- --- SO

100 General

102 Identification date Read only --- --- --- --- Info ---

103 Identification number Read only 0 9999 1 0 Info ---

113 Burner identification Edit x xxxxxxxx 1 burnErId Info SO

140 Mode display of display and operating unit AZL2...

1 = standard (program phase)

2 = flame 1 (QRA.../ION)

3 = flame 2 (QRB.../QRC...) not used

4 = active power (power value)

Edit 1 4 1 1 SO SO

164 Number of startups resettable Resettable 0 999999 1 0 Info Info

166 Total number of startups Read only 0 999999 1 0 Info ---

170.00 Switching cycles actuator relay K12 Read only 0 999999 1 0 Info ---

170.01 Switching cycles actuator relay K11 Read only 0 999999 1 0 Info ---

170.02 Switching cycles actuator relay contact 2 Read only 0 999999 1 0 Info ---

170.03 Switching cycles actuator relay contact 1 Read only 0 999999 1 0 Info ---

171 Max. switching cycles actuator relay Read only 0 999999 1 0 Info ---

Page 116: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

116/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 16 PME73.820... 29.11.2011

Parameter Parameter Edit Value range Resolution Factory setting Password level Password level

number Min. Max. reading from level writing from level

200 Burner control

224 Specified time air pressure switch Edit 0 s 13.818 s 0.294 s 13.818 s SO OEM 225 Prepurge time -2,1 seconds Edit 0 s 1237 s 4.851 s 29.106 s SO OEM 226 Preignition time Edit 1.029 s 37.485 s 0.147 s 6.174 s SO OEM 230 Interval: End of safety time - load controller release Edit 3.234 s 74.97 s 0.294 s 9.408 s SO OEM 234 Postpurge time Edit 0 s 1237 s 4.851 s 19.404 s SO OEM 240 Repetition in the event of loss of flame during operation

0 = none

1 = none

2 = 1 x Repetition

Edit 0 2 1 0 SO OEM

241.00 Valve proving

0 = OFF

1 = ON

Edit 0 1 1 1 SO OEM

241.01 Valve proving

0 = during prepurge time

1 = during postpurge time

Edit 0 1 1 1 SO OEM

241.02 Valve proving

0 = according to P241.01

1 = during prepurge time and postpurge time

Edit 0 1 1 0 SO OEM

242 Valve proving test space evacuating Edit 0 s 2.648 s 0.147 s 2.648 s SO OEM 243 Valve proving time test atmospheric pressure Edit 1.029 s 37.485 s 0.147 s 10.290 s SO OEM 244 Valve proving test space filling Edit 0 s 2.648 s 0.147 s 2.648 s SO OEM 245 Valve proving time test gas pressure Edit 1.029 s 37.485 s 0.147 s 10.290 s SO OEM 257 Postignition time -0.3 seconds Edit 0 s 13.23 s 0.147 s 2.205 s SO OEM 259 Opening time of actuator (timeout) Edit 0 s 1237 s 4.851 s 300.762 s SO OEM

260 Closing time of actuator (timeout) Edit 0 s 1237 s 4.851 s 300.762 s SO OEM 515.00 Actuator position during prepurge time and postpurge time

0: Purging in low-fire 1: Purging in high-fire

Edit 0 1 1 1 SO OEM

515.01 Application with/without actuator 0: Without actuator 1: With actuator

Edit 0 1 1 1 SO OEM

Page 117: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

117/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 16 PME73.820... 29.11.2011

Parameter Parameter Edit Value range Resolution Factory setting Password level Password level

number Min. Max. reading from level writing from level

700 Error history

701 Current error:

00: Error code

01: Startup meter reading

02: MMI phase

03: Power value

Read only

2

0

---

0%

255

999999

---

100%

1

1

---

1

--- Service ---

702 Error history former 1:

00: Error code

01: Startup meter reading

02: MMI phase

03: Power value

Read only

2

0

---

0%

255

999999

---

100%

1

1

---

1

--- Service ---

711 Error history former 10:

00: Error code

01: Startup meter reading

02: MMI phase

03: Power value

Read only

2

0

---

0%

255

999999

---

100%

1

1

---

1

--- Service ---

900 Process data

936 Normalized speed Read only 0% 100% 0.01% --- Service ---

951 Mains voltage Read only 0 V LME73.000A1: 175 V

LME73.000A2: 350 V

1 V --- Service ---

954 Flame intensity Read only 0% 100% 1% --- Service ---

Page 118: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

118/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 17 PME73.830... 29.11.2011

17 PME73.830... 17.1 Program sequence PME73.830...

For connection diagram fuel trains (G)/(Gp1/1)/(Gp1/2)

7105d76e/1111

M

Z

V1

V2

AL

K1X2-02 Pin 3

Act

uato

r p

ositi

on

High-fire

Low-fire

Ignition load

CLOSE

R

LR-AUF

LR-ZU

LP

Pmin

P LT

ION / QRA

X3-04 Pin 5

Relaycontact Function / inputs

Display and operating unit parameter number

LED permanent

LED flashing

tw t11 t10 t12 t3 t3n t4 t11 td4 td1 td3 td2

Standby Startup Operation Shutdown Valve proving

If parameter P241.00 =1 (ON)

Can be parameterized

t1 TSA

224 225 226 257 230 231 232 234

Relaycontact Function / outputs

SKX3-04 Pin 1

X5-03 Pin 1

X5-03 Pin 3

X65 Pin 1

X5-03 Pin 2

X65 Pin 1

X3-02 Pin 1

X5-01 Pin 2

X2-02 Pin 4

X9-04 Pin 2

PV

SVK1X6-03 Pin 3

K4X2-01 Pin 3

K5X4-02 Pin 3

K2/2X7-01 Pin 3

K7X7-04 Pin 4

X7-02 Pin 3

K2/1X2-03 Pin 3

Phase number 21 22 24 22 30 30 38 40 42 44 50 50 72 74 10 80 81 82 83

t9 t5

SA-NLK11X2-09 Pin 3

SA-KLK12X2-09 Pin 2

SA-ZUX2-09 Pin 1

SA-RX2-09 Pin 4

Input bridge for PVX2-09 Pin 8

Output PVX2-09 Pin 7

36

260

t22

74

t8

242 243 244 245259

POC

POC

*) *) *) *) *)

K4

K2/2

240240 240 240 240 240

*1

*2

Figure 55: Program sequence PME73.830... for connection diagram fuel trains (G)/(Gp1/1)/(Gp1/2) *) During the actuator running phases, the actuator feedback signal must be OFF first, then ON. *1 Valve proving, if P241.00 = 1 after mains ON, lockout or P234 (postpurge time t8) or P241.01 = 0 second *2 Valve proving, if P241.00 = 1 and P234 (postpurge time t8) >0 second and P241.01 = 1

Page 119: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

119/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 17 PME73.830... 29.11.2011

Phase number

Function

LOC Lockout shutdown phase

OFF Standby, waiting for heat request

oP:xx Part 1: Request load controller OPEN Part 2: Modulation of actuator toward high-fire Part 3: High-fire reached Part 4: Request load controller CLOSE Part 5: Modulation of actuator toward low-fire Part 6: Low-fire reached

oP:P1 Interval: Pilot valve OFF and release of load controller

10 Actuator travels to the CLOSED position, home run

21 Safety valve ON, air pressure switch in no-load position Check if POC is closed, actuator travels to the CLOSED position

22 Part 1: Fan motor ON Part 2: Specified time air pressure switch Message (timeout), stabelization of air pressure switch

24 Opening time of actuator (timeout)

30 Part 1: Prepurge time without flame simulation test Valve proving when… parameter 241 = 1 after power ON lockout, or parameter 234 (postpurge time) = 0 seconds Part 2: Prepurge time with flame simulation test (2.1 seconds)

36 Closing time of actuator (timeout)

38 Preignition time

40 Postignition time, parameter 257 + 0.3 seconds

42 Flame detection

44 Interval: End of ignition safety time and fuel valve 1 ON

50 Part 1: Interval: Fuel valve 1 ON and pilot valve OFF Part 2: Response time

72 Opening time of actuator (timeout)

74 Part 1: Operation is ended, check if postpurging is programmed Part 2: Postpurge time Valve proving when… parameter 241 = 1, and parameter 234 (postpurge time) >0 seconds

80 Test space is evacuated

81 Atmospheric pressure test

82 Test space is filled

83 Gas pressure test

90 Pressure switch-min open → safety shutdown

*) During the actuator’s running phases, the actuator’s feedback signal must first be OFF, then ON

*1 Valve proving, if P241.00 = 1 after mains ON, lockout or P234 (postpurge time) or P241.01 = 0 second

*2 Valve proving, if P241.00 = 1 and P234 (postpurge time) >0 second

Key to phases

Page 120: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

120/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 17 PME73.830... 29.11.2011

Connection diagrams for fuel train applications (examples) 17.1.1 Gas direct ignition (G), 1-stage

SV

V1

Program G Gas direct 1-stage

X2-09

SA

-ZS

A-K

LS

A-N

LS

A-R PE

Inp

ut P

VO

utp

ut P

V

LME73.000...

X7-04

LME73.000...X7-01

Figure 56: Connection diagram fuel train gas direct ignition (G), 1-stage

17.1.2 Gas pilot ignition 1 (Gp1/1), 1-stage

SV

V1

Program Gp1/1 Gas pilot 1, 1-stage

PV

X7-01 X7-04

LME73.000...

Figure 57: Connection diagram fuel train gas pilot ignition 1 (Gp1/1), 1-stage

Page 121: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

121/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 17 PME73.830... 29.11.2011

17.1.3 Gas pilot ignition 1 (Gp1/2), 1-stage, with valve proving

SV V1

Program Gp1/2 Gas pilot 1, 1-stage

PV

X7-01 X7-04V2

X7-02

LME73.000...

Figure 58: Connection diagram fuel train gas pilot ignition 1 (Gp1/2), 1-stage, with valve proving

17.1.4 Gas direct ignition 1 (Gp1/2), 1-stage, with valve proving

SV V1

Program Gp1/2 Gas direct 1, 1-stage

V2X7-02

LME73.000...

X7-04X7-01

Figure 59: Connection diagram fuel train gas direct ignition 1 (Gp1/2), 1-stage, with valve proving

Note: When valve proving is activated (e.g. on shutdown), the load on the valve’s terminals (according to chapter Technical data/Terminal rating Outputs) is restricted. Fuel valve 1 X7-04 pin 4/fuel valve 2 X7-02 pin 3/auxiliary output AUX Rated voltage AC 120 V AC 230 V

50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz Rated current 1 A 1 A Power factor cos >0.4 cos >0.4 If the terminal load (according to chapter Technical data/Terminal rating Outputs) is not reduced (max. rated current 2 A, cos >0.4), the design lifetime will be reached after about 100,000 burner startup cycles!

Page 122: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

122/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 17 PME73.830... 29.11.2011

17.1.5 Gas valve proving Valve proving is depending on parameter 241. This is valve proving designed to detect leaking gas valves and, if necessary, prevent the valves from opening or ignition from being switched on. Lockout is initiated. Valve proving with separate pressure switch

Step 1: td4 – test space evacuating. Gas valve on the burner side is opened to bring the test space to atmospheric pressure. Step 2: td1 – test atmospheric pressure. When the gas valve has closed, the gas pressure in the test space must not exceed a certain level. Step 3: td3 – test space filling. Gas valve on the mains side opens to fill the test space. Step 4: td2 – test gas pressure. When the gas valve has closed, the gas pressure in the test space must not drop below a certain level. Legend td1 Test atmospheric pressure td2 Test gas pressure td3 Test space filling td4 Test space evacuating V… Fuel valve P LT Pressure switch valve proving

Input/output signal 1 (ON)

Input/output signal 0 (OFF)

P LT

7105d68e/1210

PLT

Figure 60: Valve proving with separate pressure switch

Input permissible signal 1 (ON) or 0 (OFF) Valve proving can be parameterized to take place on startup, shutdown, or both. Recommendation: Perform valve proving on shutdown.

No. Parameter 241.00 Valve proving

0 = OFF 1 = ON ¹)

242 Valve proving test space evacuating 243 Valve proving time test atmospheric pressure 244 Valve proving test space filling 245 Valve proving time test gas pressure

¹) Valve proving during postpurging, if P234 >0 (postpurge time) and P241.01 = 1

Note! If valve proving is parameterized to take place on startup and shutdown, the gas valves must run through additional switching cycles. As a result, strain (wear) on the gas valves and the relay increases.

Page 123: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

123/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 17 PME73.830... 29.11.2011

Warning! The OEM must set the evacuation, filling and test times for atmospheric or mains pressure on every plant in compliance with the requirements of EN 1643. If not observed, there is a risk of impairment of safety functions.

It must be ensured that the 2 test times are correctly set. It is to be checked whether the gas required for the test may be fed into the combustion chamber (on the relevant application). The test times are safety-related. After a reset and in the case of aborted or prevented valve proving, the unit will perform valve proving the next time it is started up (only when valve proving is activated). In the case of valve proving, prepurging is active during the startup phase, even if it has been deactivated. Examples of aborted valve proving: When the safety loop or the start prevention input for gas (containing pressure switch-min) opens during valve proving. Valve proving – calculation of leakage rate (PG - Pw) • V • 3600

tTest =

Patm • QLeck QLeck in l/h Leakage rate in liters per hour

PG in mbar Overpressure between the valves at the beginning of the test phase

PW in mbar Overpressure set on the pressure switch (normally 50%

of the gas inlet pressure)

Patm in mbar Absolute air pressure (1013 mbar normal pressure)

V in l Volume between the valves (test volume) including valve volume

and pilot pipe, if present (Gp1 mod)

tTest in s Test time

Page 124: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

124/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 17 PME73.830... 29.11.2011

17.2 Connection diagram for LME73.000... with actuator SQM4... (example 1)

Note: The connection diagram shown is merely an example which must be verified in the individual case depending on the application!

PME73.830... 1-stage modulating With/without pilot ignition With/without valve proving

X3X2X1 12 3

VIV

III

5

M

III

VI

2134123 4 56

I

VIVIV

III

II

7105

d19e

/100

9

X2-09

SA

-ZS

A-K

LS

A-N

LS

A-R PE

Inpu

t Db

r3 fo

r P

VO

utp

ut P

V

X66

ASZ12.33

a b c

Terminal X66on LME73.000...

Type

SQNx1...SQMx1...SQNx0...SQMx0...

2 (Sig

nal)

3 (GN

D)

a b ca b c

abcabc

Terminal potentiometer(1 kOhm conductiveplastic 90°) ASZxx30

Rotation direction

Clo

ckw

ise

Cou

nte

r-cl

ockw

ise

XX

XX

------

------

Figure 61: Connection diagram for LME73.000... with actuator SQM4... (example 1)

Page 125: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

125/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 17 PME73.830... 29.11.2011

17.3 Time table and settings for program sequence PME73.830... Type Times in seconds

PME73.830... tw TSA max.

t1 P225

4) min.

t3 P226 min.

t3n P257

approx.

t4 P230min.

t5 P232min.

t8 P234

5) min.

t9 P231

approx.

t10 P224

approx.

t11 P259

approx.

t12 P260

approx. t22 1) 2) 3)

td1 td2 min.

td3 td4

max.

Requirement 2.5 3 30 6 2.5 9 8.5 15 3 15 300 300 t9+1 --- --- --- 10 3 Factory setting --- t3n+0.45 29.106+2.1 6.174 2.205+0.3 9.408 8.82 19.404 2.646 13.818 300.762 300.762 --- --- --- --- 10.29 2.646

Max. 2.5 14 1237+2.1 37.485 13.23+0.3 74.97 74.97 1237 74.97 13.818 1237 1237 --- 1 0.45 0.45 37.485 2.646 Min. --- --- 0+2.1 1.029 0+0.3 3.234 2.058 0 0 0 0 0 --- 0.3 0.3 --- 1.029 0

Step size --- --- 4.851 0.147 0.147 0.294 0.294 4.851 0.294 0.294 4.851 4.851 --- --- --- --- 0.147 0.147 Function parameter Parameter number Factory setting Repetition in the event of loss of flame during operation <2: None = 2: 1 x

P240 0

Valve proving 0: Inactive 1: Active

P241.00 1

Valve proving 0: During prepurge time 1: During postpurge time

P241.01 1

Valve proving 0: According to P241.01 1: During prepurge time and postpurge time

P241.02 0

Actuator position during prepurge time and postpurge time 0: Purging in low-fire 1: Purging in high-fire

P515 1

Legend tw Waiting time t10 Specified time air pressure switch state message (timeout) TSA Safety time t11 Opening time of actuator (timeout) t1 Prepurge time t12 Closing time of actuator (timeout) t3 Preignition time t22 2nd safety time t3n Postignition time (P257 +0.3 seconds) t4 Interval: End of safety time - fuel valve 1 ON td1 Test atmospheric pressure t5 Interval: Pilot valve OFF - load controller release td2 Test gas pressure t8 Postpurge time td3 Test space filling t9 Interval: Fuel valve 1 ON - pilot valve OFF td4 Test space evacuating 1) Response time to a change of signal by air pressure switch (opens) and response time in the event of loss of flame 2) Response time to a change of signal by inputs (e.g. pressure switch-min) 3) Flame detection time 4) Minimum time td1 + td2 + td3 + td4 if: Parameter P241.00 = 1 (ON), after mains ON, with lockout, P234 (postpurge time) = 0 (postpurging) or P241.01 = 0 5) Minimum time td1 + td2 + td3 + td4 if: Parameter P241.00 = 1 (ON) and P234 (postpurge time) >0 (postpurging) and P241.01 = 1

Page 126: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

126/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 17 PME73.830... 29.11.2011

17.4 LME73.000...: Inputs and outputs/internal connection diagram

Figure 62: LM73.000...: Inputs and outputs/internal connection diagram

Page 127: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

127/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 17 PME73.830... 29.11.2011

17.5 Parameter list PME73.830... (AZL2...)

Value range Parameter

number

Parameter Edit

Min. Max.

Resolution Factory setting Password level

reading from level

Password level

writing from level

000 Internal parameter

41 Heating engineer's password (4 characters) Edit xxxx xxxx --- --- --- OEM

42 OEM's password (5 characters) Edit xxxxx xxxxx --- --- --- OEM

60 Backup/restore Edit Restore Backup --- --- --- SO

100 General

102 Identification date Read only --- --- --- --- Info ---

103 Identification number Read only 0 9999 1 0 Info ---

113 Burner identification Edit x xxxxxxxx 1 burnErId Info SO

123 Min. power control step Edit 1% 10% 0.1 2 SO SO

140 Mode display of display and operating unit AZL2...

1 = standard (program phase)

2 = flame 1 (QRA.../ION)

3 = flame 2 (QRB.../QRC...) not used

4 = active power (power value)

Edit 1 4 4 1 SO SO

164 Number of startups resettable Resettable 0 999999 1 0 Info Info

166 Total number of startups Read only 0 999999 1 0 Info ---

170.00 Switching cycles actuator relay K12 Read only 0 999999 1 0 Info ---

170.01 Switching cycles actuator relay K11 Read only 0 999999 1 0 Info ---

170.02 Switching cycles actuator relay contact 2 Read only 0 999999 1 0 Info ---

170.03 Switching cycles actuator relay contact 1 Read only 0 999999 1 0 Info ---

171 Max. switching cycles actuator relay Read only 0 999999 1 0 Info ---

Page 128: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

128/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 17 PME73.830... 29.11.2011

Value range Parameter

number

Parameter Edit

Min. Max.

Resolution Factory setting Password level

reading from level

Password level

writing from level

200 Burner control

224 Specified time air pressure switch Edit 0 s 13.818 s 0.294 s 13.818 s SO OEM 225 Prepurge time -2,1 seconds Edit 0 s 1237 s 4.851 s 29.106 s SO OEM 226 Preignition time Edit 1.029 s 37.485 s 0.147 s 6.174 s SO OEM 230 Interval: End of safety time - fuel valve 1 ON Edit 3.234 s 74.97 s 0.294 s 9.408 s SO OEM 231 Interval: Fuel valve 1 ON - pilot valve OFF Edit 0 s 74.97 s 0.294 s 2.646 s SO OEM 232 Interval: Pilot valve OFF - load controller release Edit 2.058 s 74.97 s 0.294 s 8.820 s SO OEM 234 Postpurge time Edit 0 s 1237 s 4.851 s 19.404 s SO OEM 240 Repetition in the event of loss of flame during operation

0 = none

1 = none

2 = 1 x Repetition

Edit 0 2 1 0 SO OEM

241.00 Valve proving

0 = OFF

1 = ON

Edit 0 1 1 1 SO OEM

241.01 Valve proving

0 = during prepurge time

1 = during postpurge time

Edit 0 1 1 1 SO OEM

241.02 Valve proving

0 = according to P241.01

1 = during prepurge time and postpurge time

Edit 0 1 1 0 SO OEM

242 Valve proving test space evacuating Edit 0 s 2.648 s 0.147 s 2.648 s SO OEM 243 Valve proving time test atmospheric pressure Edit 1.029 s 37.485 s 0.147 s 10.290 s SO OEM 244 Valve proving test space filling Edit 0 s 2.648 s 0.147 s 2.648 s SO OEM 245 Valve proving time test gas pressure Edit 1.029 s 37.485 s 0.147 s 10.290 s SO OEM 247 Continuous pilot (during operation)

0 = OFF

1 = ON

Edit 0 1 1 0 SO OEM

257 Postignition time -0.3 seconds Edit 0 s 13.23 s 0.147 s 2.205 s SO OEM 259 Opening time of actuator (timeout) Edit 0 s 1237 s 4.851 s 300.762 s SO OEM

260 Closing time of actuator (timeout) Edit 0 s 1237 s 4.851 s 300.762 s SO OEM 515 Actuator position during prepurge time and postpurge time

0: Purging in low-fire 1: Purging in high-fire

Edit 0 1 1 1 SO OEM

Page 129: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

129/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 17 PME73.830... 29.11.2011

Parameter Parameter Edit Value range Resolution Factory setting Password level Password level

number Min. Max. reading from level writing from level

600 Power setting

654 Analog input (feedback potentiometer ASZxx.3x required)

0 = 3-position step input

1 = 0...10 V

2 = 0...135

3 = 0...20 mA

4 = 4...20 mA with lockout at I <4 mA

5 = 4...20 mA

Edit 0 5 1 1 SO SO

700 Error history

701 Current error:

00: Error code

01: Startup meter reading

02: MMI phase

03: Power value

Read only

2

0

---

0%

255

999999

---

100%

1

1

---

1

--- Service ---

702 Error history former 1:

00: Error code

01: Startup meter reading

02: MMI phase

03: Power value

Read only

2

0

---

0%

255

999999

---

100%

1

1

---

1

--- Service ---

711 Error history former 10:

00: Error code

01: Startup meter reading

02: MMI phase

03: Power value

Read only

2

0

---

0%

255

999999

---

100%

1

1

---

1

--- Service ---

900 Process data

936 Normalized speed Read only 0% 100% 0.01% --- Service ---

951 Mains voltage Read only 0 V LME73.000A1: 175 V

LME73.000A2: 350 V

1 V --- Service ---

954 Flame intensity Read only 0% 100% 1% --- Service ---

Page 130: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

130/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 18 PME73.831… 29.11.2011

18 PME73.831… 18.1 Program sequence PME73.831…

For connection diagram fuel trains G/Gp1/Gp2 (without valve proving)

7105d60e/1111

M

Z

V1

V2

AL

K1X2-02 Pin 3

Act

uato

r p

ositi

on

High-fire

Ignition load

Low-fire

CLOSE

R

LR-OPEN

LR-CLOSE

LP

Pmin

P LT

ION / QRA

QRB / QRC

X3-04 Pin 5

Relaycontact Function / inputs

Display and operating unit parameter number

LED permanent

LED flashing

tw t11 t10 t12 t3 t3n t4 t8 td4 td1 td3 td2

Standby Startup Operation Shutdown Valve proving

If parameter P241 =1 (ON)

Can beparameterized

t1 TSA

259 225 260 226 257 230 231 260 232 234

Relaycontact Function / outputs

SKX3-04 Pin 1

X5-03 Pin 1

X5-03 Pin 3

X65 Pin 1

X5-03 Pin 2

X65 Pin 1

X3-02 Pin 1

X5-01 Pin 2

X2-02 Pin 4

X9-04 Pin 2

PV

SVK1X6-03 Pin 3

K4X2-01 Pin 3

K5X4-02 Pin 3

K2/2X7-01 Pin 3

K7X7-04 Pin 4

X7-02 Pin 3

K2/1X2-03 Pin 3

Phase number 21 22 24 22 30 30 36 38 40 42 44 50 54 54 72 74 10 80 81 82 83 oP1

t9 t12 t5

SA-NLK11X2-09 Pin 3

SA-KLK12X2-09 Pin 2

SA-ZUX2-09 Pin 1

SA-RX2-09 Pin 4

Output SA-ZL camsK2/2X2-09 Pin 7

Input SA-ZL camsX2-09 Pin 8

X2-02 Pin 4

*3

*1 *2

*3

*4

*1

*2

Fig. 63: Program sequence PME73.831... to connection diagram fuel trains (G)/(Gp1)/(Gp2)

Version 1: Ignition load < low-fire Prepurging in high-fire Parameter 515 = 1 (requirement parameter 259.01 > 0 seconds)

Page 131: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

131/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 18 PME73.831… 29.11.2011

7105d61e/1111

M

Z

V1

V2

AL

K1X2-02 Pin 3

Act

uato

r p

ositi

on

High-fire

Ignition load

Low-fire

CLOSE

R

LR-OPEN

LR-CLOSE

LP

Pmin

P LT

ION / QRA

QRB / QRC

X3-04 Pin 5

Relaycontact Function / inputs

Display and operating unit parameter number

LED permanent

LED flashing

tw t11 t10 t12 t3 t3n t4 t8 td4 td1 td3 td2

Standby Startup Operation Shutdown Valve proving *4

If parameter P241 =1 (ON)

parametrierbart1 TSA

259 225 260 226 257 230 231 260 232 234

Relaycontact Function / outputs

SKX3-04 Pin 1

X5-03 Pin 1

X5-03 Pin 3

X65 Pin 1

X5-03 Pin 2

X65 Pin 1

X3-02 Pin 1

X5-01 Pin 2

X2-02 Pin 4

X9-04 Pin 2

PV

SVK1X6-03 Pin 3

K4X2-01 Pin 3

K5X4-02 Pin 3

K2/2X7-01 Pin 3

K7X7-04 Pin 4

X7-02 Pin 3

K2/1X2-03 Pin 3

Phase number 21 22 24 22 30 30 36 38 40 42 44 50 54 72 74 10 80 81 82 83 oP1

t9 t12 t5

SA-NLK11X2-09 Pin 3

SA-KLK12X2-09 Pin 2

SA-ZUX2-09 Pin 1

SA-RX2-09 Pin 4

Output SA-ZL camsK2/2X2-09 Pin 7

Inputs SA-ZL camsX2-09 Pin 8

X2-02 Pin 4

*3

*1 *2

*3

oP:xx(actual power in %)

*1

*2

Fig. 64: Program sequence PME73.831... to connection diagram fuel trains (G)/(Gp1)/(Gp2)

Version 2: Ignition load > low-fire Prepurging in high-fire Parameter 515 = 1 (requirement parameter 259.01 = 0 seconds)

Page 132: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

132/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 18 PME73.831… 29.11.2011

7105d62e/1111

M

Z

V1

V2

AL

K1X2-02 Pin 3

Act

uato

r p

ositi

on

High-fire

Ignition load

Low-fire

CLOSE

R

LR-AUF

LR-ZU

LP

Pmin

P LT

ION / QRA

QRB / QRC

X3-04 Pin 5

Relaycontact Function / inputs

Display and operating unit parameter number

LED permanent

LED flashing

tw t11 t10 t12 t3 t3n t4 t8 td4 td1 td3 td2

Standby Startup Operation Shutdown Vavle proving *4

If parameter P241 =1 (ON)

Can be parameterized

t1 TSA

259 225 260 226 257 230 231 260 232 234

Relaycontact Function / outputs

SKX3-04 Pin 1

X5-03 Pin 1

X5-03 Pin 3

X65 Pin 1

X5-03 Pin 2

X65 Pin 1

X3-02 Pin 1

X5-01 Pin 2

X2-02 Pin 4

X9-04 Pin 2

PV

SVK1X6-03 Pin 3

K4X2-01 Pin 3

K5X4-02 Pin 3

K2/2X7-01 Pin 3

K7X7-04 Pin 4

X7-02 Pin 3

K2/1X2-03 Pin 3

Phase number 21 22 24 22 30 30 36 38 40 42 44 50 54 54 72 74 10 80 81 82 83 oP1

t9 t12 t5

SA-NLK11X2-09 Pin 3

SA-KLK12X2-09 Pin 2

SA-ZUX2-09 Pin 1

SA-RX2-09 Pin 4

Output SA-ZL camsK2/2X2-09 Pin 7

Input SA-ZL camsX2-09 Pin 8

X2-02 Pin 4

24

t12

260

*3

*1 *2

*3

*1

*2

Fig. 65: Program sequence PME73.831... to connection diagram fuel trains (G)/(Gp1)/(Gp2)

Version 3: Ignition load < low-fire Prepurging in low-fire Parameter 515 = 0

(requirement: - parameter 259.01 > 0 seconds and - parameter 259.02 = 0)

Page 133: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

133/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 18 PME73.831… 29.11.2011

7105d67e/1111

M

Z

V1

V2

AL

K1X2-02 Pin 3

Act

uato

r p

ositi

on

High-fire

Ignition load

Low-fire

CLOSE

R

LR-OPEN

LR-CLOSE

LP

Pmin

P LT

ION / QRA

QRB / QRC

X3-04 Pin 5

Relaycontact Function / inputs

Display and operating unit parameter number

LED permanent

LED flashing

tw t11 t10 t12 t3 t3n t4 t8 td4 td1 td3 td2

Standby Startup Operation Shutdown Valve proving *4

If parameter P241 =1 (ON)

Can beparameterized

t1 TSA

259 225 226 257 230 231 260 232 234

Relaycontact Function /outputs

SKX3-04 Pin 1

X5-03 Pin 1

X5-03 Pin 3

X65 Pin 1

X5-03 Pin 2

X65 Pin 1

X3-02 Pin 1

X5-01 Pin 2

X2-02 Pin 4

X9-04 Pin 2

PV

SVK1X6-03 Pin 3

K4X2-01 Pin 3

K5X4-02 Pin 3

K2/2X7-01 Pin 3

K7X7-04 Pin 4

X7-02 Pin 3

K2/1X2-03 Pin 3

Phase number 21 22 24 22 30 30 36 38 40 42 44 50 54 72 74 10 80 81 82 83 oP1

t9 t12 t5

SA-NLK11X2-09 Pin 3

SA-KLK12X2-09 Pin 2

SA-ZUX2-09 Pin 1

SA-RX2-09 Pin 4

Output SA-ZL camsK2/2X2-09 Pin 7

Input SA-ZL camsX2-09 Pin 8

X2-02 Pin 4

*3

*1 *2

*3

24

t12

260

36

260

oP:xx(actual power in %)

*1

*2

*) *) *) *) *)

Fig. 66: Program sequence PME73.831... to connection diagram fuel trains (G)/(Gp1)/(Gp2)

Version 4: Ignition load > low-fire Prepurging in low-fire Parameter 515 = 0

(requirement: - parameter 259.01 = 0 and - parameter 259.02 > 0 seconds)

Page 134: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

134/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 18 PME73.831… 29.11.2011

Phase number

Function

LOC Lockout shutdown phase

OFF Standby, waiting for heat request

oP Operation, modulating operation

oP1 Interval to release of preset load controller (analog or 3-position step input)

01 Undervoltage

02 Safety loop open

04 Extraneous light on burner startup (timeout/lockout after 30 seconds)

08 Power ON/test phase (e.g. detector test)

10 Shutdown, actuator travels to the CLOSED position (home run)

21 Safety valve ON, air pressure switch OFF, actuator travels to the CLOSED position

22 Part 1: Fan motor ON Part 2: Specified time air pressure switch Message (timeout), stabelization of air pressure switch

24 Actuator in prepurge position fahren

30 Part 1: Prepurge time without flame simulation test Valve proving when… parameter 241.00 = 1 after power ON, lockout, or parameter 234 (postpurge time) = 0 second or parameter 241.01 = 1 Part 2: Prepurge time with flame simulation test

36 Part 1: Actuator opens to a position > ignition load Part 2: Actuator closes until ignition load position is reached

38 Preignition time

40 Postignition time, parameter 257 + 0.3 seconds

42 Flame detection

44 Interval: End of ignition safety time and fuel valve 2 ON

50 2nd safety time

54 Parameter 259.01: Actuator opens to a position > low-fire Parameter 260: Actuator closes until low-fire position is reached

72 Operation is ended, check if valve proving shall be conducted

74 Postpurging

80 Test space is evacuated

81 Proving time fuel valve 1

82 Test space is filled

83 Proving time fuel valve 2

90 Pressure switch-min open → safety shutdown

*) During the actuator running phases, the actuator feedback signal must be OFF first, then ON.

*1 Valve proving is conducted when… - parameter 241.00 = 1 and parameter 241.02 = 1, or - parameter 241.00 = 1 and parameter 241.01 = 0

*2 Valve proving is conducted when… - parameter 241.00 = 1 and parameter 241.02 = 1, or - parameter 241.00 = 1 and parameter 241.01 = 1

*3 Valve proving is not conducted

*4 Valve proving only in fuel trains G and Gp1

Key to phases

Page 135: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

135/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 18 PME73.831… 29.11.2011

18.2 Connection diagrams for fuel applications (examples)

18.2.1 Gas direct ignition (G), 1-stage, without valve proving

SV

V1

Program G Gas direct 1-stage

X2-02

PE N L

LT (

ON

/OF

F)

LME73.000...

X7-04

LME73.000...X7-01

Fuel valve control

X7-01:X7-04: V1X7-02

t1 t3 TSA t4 t9 Operationt5

Fig. 67: Connection diagram fuel application gas direct ignition (G), 1-stage, without valve proving

18.2.2 Gas pilot ignition 2 (Gp2), 1-stage, without valve proving,

simultaneously ignition burner

SV

V1

Program Gp2 Gas pilot 2, 1-stage

PV

X7-02 X7-04

LME73.000...

Fuel valve control

X7-01:X7-04: PVX7-02: V1

t1 t3 TSA t4 t9 Operationt5

X2-02

PE N L

LT

(O

N/O

FF

)

LME73.000...

Fig. 68: Connection diagram fuel application gas pilot ignition 2 (Gp2), 1-stage, without valve proving

Page 136: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

136/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 18 PME73.831… 29.11.2011

18.2.3 Gas pilot ignition 1 (Gp1), 1-stage, with valve proving, alternate burning ignition burner

SV V1

Program Gp1 Gas pilot 1, 1-stage

PV

X7-01 X7-04V2

X7-02

LME73.000...

Fuel valve control

X7-01: PVX7-04: V1X7-02: V2

t1 t3 TSA t4 t9 Operationt5

Fif. 69: Connection diagram fuel application gas pilot ignition 1 (Gp1), 1-stage, with valve proving

18.2.4 Gas direct ignition 1 (G), 1-stage, with valve proving

SV V1

Program G Gas direct 1, 1-stage

V2X7-02

LME73.000...

X7-04X7-01

Fuel valve control

X7-01:X7-04: V1X7-02: V2

t1 t3 TSA t4 t9 Operationt5

Fig 70: Connection diagram fuel application gas direct ignition 1 (G), 1-stage, with valve proving

Note: When valve proving is activated (e.g. on shutdown), the load on the valve’s terminals (according to chapter Technical data/Terminal rating Outputs) is restricted. Fuel valve 1 X7-04 pin 4/fuel valve 2 X7-02 pin 3/auxiliary output AUX Rated voltage AC 120 V AC 230 V

50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz Rated current 1 A 1 A Power factor cos >0.4 cos >0.4 If the terminal load (according to chapter Technical data/Terminal rating Outputs) is not reduced (max. rated current 2 A, cos >0.4), the design lifetime will be reached after about 100,000 burner startup cycles!

Page 137: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

137/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 18 PME73.831… 29.11.2011

18.2.5 Valve proving of gas valves Valve proving is dependent on parameter 241 and/or on the input of valve proving ON/OFF (X2-02). This is valve proving designed to detect leaking gas valves and, if necessary, prevent the valves from opening or ignition from being switched on. Lockout is initiated. Valve proving with separate pressure switch

Step 1: td4 – test space evacuating. Gas valve on the burner side is opened to bring the test space to atmospheric pressure. Step 2: td1 – test atmospheric pressure. When the gas valve has closed, the gas pressure in the test space must not exceed a certain level. Step 3: td3 – test space filling. Gas valve on the mains side opens to fill the test space. Step 4: td2 – test gas pressure. When the gas valve has closed, the gas pressure in the test space must not drop below a certain level. Legend td1 Test atmospheric pressure td2 Test gas pressure td3 Test space filling td4 Test space evacuating V… Fuel valve P LT Pressure switch valve proving

Input/output signal 1 (ON)

Input/output signal 0 (OFF)

P LT

7105d63e/1210

PLT

Fig. 71: Valve proving with separate pressure switch

Input permissible signal 1 (ON) or 0 (OFF) Valve proving can be parameterized to take place on startup, shutdown, or both. Recommendation: Perform valve proving on shutdown.

No. Parameter 241.00 Valve proving

0 = OFF 1 = ON ¹)

242 Valve proving test space evacuating 243 Valve proving time test atmospheric pressure 244 Valve proving test space filling 245 Valve proving time test gas pressure

¹) Valve proving during postpurging, if P234 >0 (postpurge time) and P241.01 = 1

Note! If valve proving is parameterized to take place on startup and shutdown, the gas valves must run through additional switching cycles. As a result, strain (wear) on the gas valves and the relay increases.

Page 138: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

138/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 18 PME73.831… 29.11.2011

Warning! The OEM must set the evacuation, filling and test times for atmospheric or mains pressure on every plant in compliance with the requirements of EN 1643. If not observed, there is a risk of impairment of safety functions.

It must be ensured that the 2 test times are correctly set. It is to be checked whether the gas required for the test may be fed into the combustion chamber (on the relevant application). The test times are safety-related. After a reset and in the case of aborted or prevented valve proving, the unit will perform valve proving the next time it is started up (only when valve proving is activated). In the case of valve proving, prepurging is active during the startup phase, even if it has been deactivated. Examples of aborted valve proving: When the safety loop or the start prevention input for gas (containing pressure switch-min) opens during valve proving. Valve proving – calculation of leakage rate (PG - Pw) • V • 3600

tTest =

Patm • QLeck QLeck in l/h Leakage rate in liters per hour

PG in mbar Overpressure between the valves at the beginning of the test phase

PW in mbar Overpressure set on the pressure switch (normally 50%

of the gas inlet pressure)

Patm in mbar Absolute air pressure (1013 mbar normal pressure)

V in l Volume between the valves (test volume) including valve volume

and pilot pipe, if present (Gp1 mod)

tTest in s Test time

Page 139: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

139/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 18 PME73.831… 29.11.2011

18.3 Connection diagram for LME73.000... with actuator SQM4... (example 1)

Note: The connection diagram shown is merely an example which must be verified in the individual case depending on the application! PME73.831... 1-stage modulating

With/without pilot ignition With/without valve proving

X3X2X1 12 3

VIV

III

5

M

III

VI

2134123 4 56

I

VIV

IV

III

II

7105

d65e

/121

0

X2-09

SA

-ZS

A-K

LS

A-N

LS

A-R PE

Inpu

t SA

-ZL

cam

sO

utpu

t SA

-ZL

cam

s

X66

ASZ12.33

a b c

Type

SQNx1...SQMx1...SQNx0...SQMx0...

2 (Sig

nal

)

3 (GN

D)

a b ca b c

abcabc

Terminal potentiometer(1 kOhm conductive 90°)ASZxx30

Direction ofrotation

Clo

ckw

ise

Co

unte

r-cl

ock

wis

e

------

------

Ignition load

Low-fireCLOSE

High-fire

Only required for modulation viaanalog signal (0...10 V, 4...20 mA,0... 135 Ohm) (parameter 560 = 2)!

Caution! Pilot valve is switched via the actuator’s cam. Observe technical data of actuator!

Fig. 72: Connection diagram for LME73.000... with actuator SQM4... (example 2)

Page 140: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

140/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 18 PME73.831… 29.11.2011

18.4 Connection diagram for LME73.000... with actuator SQM4... (example 2)

Note: The connection diagram shown is merely an example which must be verified in the individual case depending on the application!

PME73.831... 1-stage modulating With/without pilot ignition With/without valve proving

X3X2X1 12 3

VIV

III

5

M

III

VI

2134123 4 56

I

VIV

IV

III

II

71

05d

64e

/12

10

X2-09

SA

-ZS

A-K

LS

A-N

LS

A-R PE

Inp

ut S

A-Z

L ca

ms

Ou

tpu

t SA

-ZL

cam

sX66

ASZ12.33

a b c

Type

SQNx1...SQMx1...SQNx0...SQMx0...

2 (Sig

nal

)

3 (GN

D)

a b ca b c

abcabc

Terminal potentiometer(1 kOhm conductive 90°)ASZxx30

Direction ofrotation

Clo

ckw

ise

Co

unte

r-cl

ock

wis

e

------

------

N

External relayfor pilot valve

Ignition load

Low-fire

CLOSE

High-fire

Only required for modulation viaanalog signal (0...10 V, 4...20 mA,0... 135 Ohm) (parameter 560 = 2)!

Only required if switching loadof cam switch in the actuatorIs lower than the current consumption of the pilot valve!

Fig. 73: Connection diagram for LME73.000... with actuator SQM4... (example 1)

Page 141: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

141/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 18 PME73.831… 29.11.2011

18.5 Time table and settings for program sequence PME73.831... Type Time in seconds

PME73.831... tw TSA max.

t1

P225 4) min.

t3 P226 min.

t3n P257

approx.

t4 P230min.

t5 P232min.

t8 P234

5) min.

t9 P231

approx.

t10 P224

approx.

t11 P259

approx.

t12 P260

approx. t22

P2541)

2)

3)

td1 td2 min.

td3 td4

max.

Requirement 2.5 3 30 2 2.5 3 8.5 0 3 12 65 65 t9+P254(1/3) --- --- --- 10 3 Factory setting --- t3n+0.45 29.106+2.1 2.058 2.205+0.3 3.234 8.82 0 2.94 12.054 67.914 67.914 --- 1 --- --- 10.29 2.646

Max. 2.5 14 1237+2.1 37.485 13.23+0.3 74.97 74.97 1237 74.97 13.818 1237 1237 --- 3 0.45 0.45 37.485 2.646 Min. --- --- 0+2.1 1.029 0+0.3 3.234 2.058 0 0 0 0 0 --- 1 0.3 --- 1.029 0

Step size --- --- 4.851 0.147 0.147 0.294 0.294 4.851 0.294 0.294 4.851 4.851 --- --- --- --- 0.147 0.147 Type Time in seconds

PME73.831...

P259.01 approx.

P259.02 approx.

Requirement 15 15 Factory setting 14.994 14.994

Max. 37.485 37.485 Min. 0 0

Step size 0.147 0.147 Function parameter Parameter number Factory setting Repetition in the event of loss of flame during operation <2: None = 2: 1 x

P240 0

Valve proving 0: Inactive 1: Active

P241.00 1

Valve proving 0: During prepurge time 1: During postpurge time

P241.01 0

Valve proving 0: According to P241.01 1: During prepurge time and postpurge time

P241.02 0

Response time flame error or air pressure switch error 0: 1 second 1: 3 seconds

P254 0

Intermittent operation after 24 hours of continuous operation 0: OFF 1: ON

P239 1

Actuator position during prepurge time and postpurge time 0: Purging in low-fire 1: Purging in high-fire

P515 1

Page 142: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

142/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 18 PME73.831… 29.11.2011

Legend

tw Waiting time t10 Specified time air pressure switch state message (timeout) TSA Safety time t11 Opening time of actuator (timeout) t1 Prepurge time t12 Closing time of actuator (timeout) t3 Preignition time t22 2nd safety time t3n Postignition time (P257 +0.3 seconds) td1 Test atmospheric pressure t4 Interval: End of ignition safety time – fuel valve 2 ON td2 Test gas pressure t5 Interval: Pilot valve OFF – release of load controller td3 Test space is filled t8 Postpurge time td4 Test space evacuating t9 Interval: Fuel valve 2 ON – pilot valve OFF

1) Response time to a change of signal by the air pressure switch (opens) and response time in the event of loss of flame 2) Response time to a change of signal by the inputs (e.g. pressure switch-min) 3) Flame detection time 4) Minimum time td1 + td2 + td3 + td4 if: Parameter P241.00 = 1 (ON), after power ON, with lockout, P234 (postpurge time) = 0 (postpurging) or P241.01 = 0 5) Minimum time td1 + td2 + td3 + td4 if: Parameter P241.00 = 1 (ON) and P234 (postpurge time) >0 (postpurging) and P241.01 = 1 P259.01 Actuator running time from ignition load to a position > low-fire P259.02 Actuator running time from low-fire to a position > ignition load

Page 143: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

143/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 18 PME73.831… 29.11.2011

18.6 LME73.000...: Inputs and outputs/internal connection diagram

Fig. 74: LME73.000...: Inputs and outputs/internal connection diagram

Page 144: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

144/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 18 PME73.831… 29.11.2011

18.7 Parameter list PME73.831... (AZL2...)

Value range Parameter

number

Parameter Edit

Min. Max.

Resolution Factory setting Password level

reading from level

Password level

writing from level

000 Internal parameter

41 Heating engineer's password (4 characters) Edit xxxx xxxx --- --- --- OEM

42 OEM's password (5 characters) Edit xxxxx xxxxx --- --- --- OEM

60 Backup/restore Edit Restore Backup --- --- --- SO

100 General

102 Identification date Read only --- --- --- --- Info ---

103 Identification number Read only 0 9999 1 0 Info ---

113 Burner identification Edit x xxxxxxxx 1 burnErId Info SO

123 Min. power control step Edit 1% 10% 0,1 2 SO SO

140 Mode display of display and operating unit AZL2...

1 = standard (program phase)

2 = flame 1 (QRA.../ION)

3 = flame 2 (QRB.../QRC...) not used

4 = active power (power value)

Edit 1 4 1 4 SO SO

164 Number of startups resettable Resettable 0 999999 1 0 Info Info

166 Total number of startups Read only 0 999999 1 0 Info ---

170.00 Switching cycles actuator relay K12 Read only 0 999999 1 0 Info ---

170.01 Switching cycles actuator relay K11 Read only 0 999999 1 0 Info ---

170.02 Switching cycles actuator relay contact 2 Read only 0 999999 1 0 Info ---

170.03 Switching cycles actuator relay contact 1 Read only 0 999999 1 0 Info ---

171 Max. switching cycles actuator relay Read only 0 999999 1 0 Info ---

Page 145: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

145/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 18 PME73.831… 29.11.2011

Value range Parameter

number

Parameter Edit

Min. Max.

Resolution Factory setting Password level

reading from level

Password level

writing from level

200 Burner control

224 Specified time air pressure switch Edit 0 s 13.818 s 0.294 s 12.054 s SO OEM 225 Prepurge time -2,1 seconds Edit 0 s 1237 s 4.851 s 29.106 s SO OEM 226 Preignition time Edit 1.029 s 37.485 s 0.147 s 2.058 s SO OEM 230 Interval: End of ignition safety time – fuel valve 1 ON Edit 3.234 s 74.97 s 0.294 s 3.234 s SO OEM 231 Interval: Fuel valve 1 ON – pilot valve OFF Edit 0 s 74.97 s 0.294 s 2.940 s SO OEM 232 Interval: Pilot valve OFF – release of load controller Edit 2.058 s 74.97 s 0.294 s 8.820 s SO OEM 234 Postpurge time Edit 0 s 1237 s 4.851 s 0 s SO OEM 239 Intermittent operation after 24 hours of continuous operation

0 = OFF 1 = ON

Edit 0 1 1 1 SO OEM

240 Repetition in the event of loss of flame during operation

0 = none

1 = none

2 = 1 x Repetition

Edit 0 2 1 0 SO OEM

241.00 Valve proving

0 = OFF

1 = ON

Edit 0 1 1 1 SO OEM

241.01 Valve proving

0 = during prepurge time

1 = during postpurge time

Edit 0 1 1 0 SO OEM

241.02 Valve proving

0 = according to P241.01

1 = during prepurge time and postpurge time

Edit 0 1 1 0 SO OEM

242 Valve proving test space evacuating Edit 0 s 2.648 s 0.147 s 2.648 s SO OEM 243 Valve proving time test atmospheric pressure Edit 1.029 s 37.485 s 0.147 s 10.290 s SO OEM 244 Valve proving test space filling Edit 0 s 2.648 s 0.147 s 2.648 s SO OEM 245 Valve proving time test gas pressure Edit 1.029 s 37.485 s 0.147 s 10.290 s SO OEM 247 Dauerpilot (während Betrieb)

0 = Aus 1 = Ein

einstellbar 0 1 1 0 HF OEM

254 Response time detector error 0 = 1 s 1 = 3 s

Edit 0 1 1 0 SO OEM

257 Postignition time -0.3 seconds Edit 0 s 13.23 s 0.47 s 2.205 s SO OEM

Page 146: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

146/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 18 PME73.831… 29.11.2011

Parameter

number

Parameter Edit Value range Resolution Factory setting Password level

reading from

level

Password level

writing from level

259.00 Opening time of actuator (timeout) Edit 0 s 1237 s 4.851 s 67.914 s SO OEM

259.01 Opening time of actuator from ignition load to low-fire position Edit 0 s 37.485 s 0.147 s 14.994 s SO OEM

259.02 Opening time of actuator from low-fire to ignition load position Edit 0 s 37.485 s 0.147 s 14.994 s SO OEM

260 Closing time of actuator (timeout) Edit 0 s 1237 s 4.851 s 67.914 s SO OEM

515 Actuator position during prepurge time and postpurge time 0: Purging in low-fire 1: Purging in high-fire

Edit 0 1 1 1 SO OEM

560 Pneumatic combustion control 0 = off/3-step modulation 1 = PWM fan/analog modulation 2 = air damper/analog modulation (feedback potentiometer ASZxx.3x required)

Edit 0 2 1 0 SO SO

600 Power setting

654 Analog input (feedback potentiometer ASZxx.3x required)

0 = 3-position step input

1 = 0...10 V

2 = 0...135

3 = 0...20 mA

4 = 4...20 mA with lockout at I <4 mA

5 = 4...20 mA

Edit 0 5 1 0 SO SO

Page 147: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

147/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 18 PME73.831… 29.11.2011

Parameter

number

Parameter Edit Value range Resolution Factory setting Password level

reading from

level

Password level

writing from level

700 Error history

701 Current error:

00: Error code

01: Startup meter reading

02: MMI phase

03: Power value

Read only

2

0

---

0%

255

999999

---

100%

1

1

---

1

--- Service ---

702 Error history former 1:

00: Error code

01: Startup meter reading

02: MMI phase

03: Power value

Read only

2

0

---

0%

255

999999

---

100%

1

1

---

1

--- Service ---

711 Error history former 10:

00: Error code

01: Startup meter reading

02: MMI phase

03: Power value

Read only

2

0

---

0%

255

999999

---

100%

1

1

---

1

--- Service ---

900 Process data

936 Normalized speed Read only 0% 100% 0,01% --- Service ---

951 Mains voltage Read only 0 V LME73.000A1:

175 V

LME73.000A2:

350 V

1 V --- Service ---

954 Flame intensity Read only 0% 100% 1% --- Service ---

Page 148: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

148/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 19 PME73.840... 29.11.2011

19 PME73.840... 19.1 Program sequence PME73.840...

To connection diagram fuel trains (G)/(Gp1/1)/(Gp1/2)

7105d77e/0611

M

Z

V1

V2

AL

K1X2-02 Pin 3

Act

uato

r p

ositi

on

High-fire

Low-fire

Ignition laod

CLOSE

R

LR-OPEN

LR-CLOSE

LP

Pmin

P LT

ION / QRA

X3-04 Pin 5

Relaycontact Function / inputs

Display and operating unit parameter number

LED permanent

LED flashing

tw t11 t10 t12 t3 t3n t4 t11 td4 td1 td3 td2

Standby Startup Operation Shutdown Valve proving

If parameter P241.00 =1 (ON)

Can be parameterized

t1 TSA

224 225 226 257 230 231 232 234

Relaycontact Function / outputs

SKX3-04 Pin 1

X5-03 Pin 1

X5-03 Pin 3

X65 Pin 1

X5-03 Pin 2

X65 Pin 1

X3-02 Pin 1

X5-01 Pin 2

X2-02 Pin 4

X9-04 Pin 2

PV

SVK1X6-03 Pin 3

K4X2-01 Pin 3

K5X4-02 Pin 3

K2/2X7-01 Pin 3

K7X7-04 Pin 4

X7-02 Pin 3

K2/1X2-03 Pin 3

Phase number 7 segment in the LME... 21 22 24 22 30 30 38 40 42 44 50 50 72 74 10 80 81 82 83

t9 t5

SA-NLK11X2-09 Pin 3

SA-KLK12X2-09 Pin 2

SA-ZUX2-09 Pin 1

SA-RX2-09 Pin 4

Input Dbr3 for PVX2-09 Pin 8

Output PVX2-09 Pin 7

36

260

t22

74

t8

242 243 244 245259

POC

POC

*) *) *) *) *)

K4

K2/2

Phase number AZL2... 21 22 24 22 30 30 38 40 42 44 50 50 72 74 10 80 81 82 83 36 74

240240240240240240

t11 t12

Figure 75: Program sequence PME73.840... to connection diagram fuel trains (G)/(Gp1/1)/(Gp1/2) *) During the actuator running phases, the actuator feedback signal must be OFF first, then ON. *1 Valve proving, if P241.00 = 1 after mains ON, lockout or P234 (postpurge time t8) or P241.01 = 0 second *2 Valve proving, if P241.00 = 1 and P234 (postpurge time t8) >0 second and P241.01 = 1

Page 149: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

149/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 19 PME73.840... 29.11.2011

Phase number

Function

LOC Lockout shutdown phase

OFF Standby, waiting for heat request

oP1/oP:P1 Part 1: Request load controller OPEN Part 2: Modulation of actuator toward high-fire Part 3: High-fire reached Part 4: Request load controller CLOSE Part 5: Modulation of actuator toward low-fire Part 6: Low-fire reached

10 Shutdown, actuator travels to the CLOSED position (home run)

21 Safety valve ON, air pressure switch in no-load position Check if POC is closed, actuator travels to the CLOSED position

22 Part 1: Fan motor ON Part 2: Specified time air pressure switch Message (timeout), stabelization of air pressure switch

24 Opening time of actuator (timeout)

30 Part 1: Prepurge time without flame simulation test Valve proving when… parameter 241.00 = 1 after power ON, lockout, or parameter 234 (postpurge time) = 0 second or parameter 241.01 = 1 Part 2: Prepurge time with flame simulation test (2.1 seconds)

36 Closing time of actuator (timeout)

38 Preignition time

40 Postignition time, parameter 257 + 0.3 seconds

42 Flame detection

44 Interval: End of ignition safety time and load controller release

44 Interval: End of ignition safety time and fuel valve 2 ON

50 Part 1: Interval: Fuel valve 1 ON and pilot valve OFF Part 2: Response time

72 Opening time of actuator (timeout)

74 Part 1: Operation is ended, check if postpurging is programmed Part 2: Postpurge time Valve proving when… parameter 241.00 = 1 and parameter 234 (postpurge time) >0 seconds and parameter 241.01 = 1

80 Test space is evacuated

81 Atmospheric pressure test

81 Proving time fuel valve 1

82 Test space is filled

83 Proving time fuel valve 2

*) During the actuator’s running phases, the actuator’s feedback signal must first be OFF, then ON

Key to phases

Page 150: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

150/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 19 PME73.840... 29.11.2011

19.2 Connection diagrams for fuel train applications (examples)

19.2.1 Gas direct ignition (G), 1-stage

SV

V1

Program G Gas direct 1-stageLME73.000...

X7-04X7-01

X2-09

SA

-ZS

A-K

LS

A-N

LS

A-R PE

Inpu

t PV

Ou

tpu

t P

V

LME73.000...

Figure 76: Connection diagram fuel train gas direct ignition (G), 1-stage

19.2.2 Gas pilot ignition 1 (Gp1/1), 1-stage

SV

V1

Program Gp1/1 Gas pilot 1, 1-stage

PV

X7-01 X7-04

LME73.000...

Figure 77: Connection diagram fuel train gas pilot ignition 1 (Gp1/1), 1-stage

Page 151: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

151/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 19 PME73.840... 29.11.2011

19.2.3 Gas pilot ignition 1 (Gp1/2), 1-stage, with valve proving

SV V1

Program Gp1/2 Gas pilot 1, 1-stage

PV

X7-01 X7-04V2

X7-02

LME73.000...

Figure 78: Connection diagram fuel train gas pilot ignition 1 (Gp1/2), 1-stage, with valve proving

19.2.4 Gas direct ignition 1 (Gp1/2), 1-stage, with valve proving

SV V1

Program Gp1/2 Gas direct 1, 1-stage

V2X7-02

LME73.000...

X7-04X7-01

Figure 79: Connection diagram fuel train gas direct ignition 1 (Gp1/2), 1-stage, with valve proving

Note: When valve proving is activated (e.g. on shutdown), the load on the valve’s terminals (according to chapter Technical data/Terminal rating Outputs) is restricted. Fuel valve 1 X7-04 pin 4/fuel valve 2 X7-02 pin 3/auxiliary output AUX Rated voltage AC 120 V AC 230 V

50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz Rated current 1 A 1 A Power factor cos >0.4 cos >0.4 If the terminal load (according to chapter Technical data/Terminal rating Outputs) is not reduced (max. rated current 2 A, cos >0.4), the design lifetime will be reached after about 100,000 burner startup cycles!

Page 152: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

152/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 19 PME73.840... 29.11.2011

19.2.5 Gas valve proving Valve proving is dependent on parameter 241. This is valve proving designed to detect leaking gas valves and, if necessary, prevent the valves from opening or ignition from being switched on. Lockout is initiated. Valve proving with separate pressure switch

Step 1: td4 – test space evacuating. Gas valve on the burner side is opened to bring the test space to atmospheric pressure. Step 2: td1 – test atmospheric pressure. When the gas valve has closed, the gas pressure in the test space must not exceed a certain level. Step 3: td3 – test space filling. Gas valve on the mains side opens to fill the test space. Step 4: td2 – test gas pressure. When the gas valve has closed, the gas pressure in the test space must not drop below a certain level. Legend td1 Test atmospheric pressure td2 Test gas pressure td3 Test space filling td4 Test space evacuating V… Fuel valve P LT Pressure switch valve proving

Input/output signal 1 (ON)

Input/output signal 0 (OFF)

P LT

7105d68e/1210

PLT

Figure 80: Valve proving with separate pressure switch

Input permissible signal 1 (ON) or 0 (OFF) Valve proving can be parameterized to take place on startup, shutdown, or both. Recommendation: Perform valve proving on shutdown.

No. Parameter 241.00 Valve proving

0 = OFF 1 = ON ¹)

242 Valve proving test space evacuating 243 Valve proving time test atmospheric pressure 244 Valve proving test space filling 245 Valve proving time test gas pressure

¹) Valve proving during postpurging, if P234 >0 (postpurge time) and P241.01 = 1

Note! If valve proving is parameterized to take place on startup and shutdown, the gas valves must run through additional switching cycles. As a result, strain (wear) on the gas valves and the relay increases.

Page 153: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

153/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 19 PME73.840... 29.11.2011

Warning! The OEM must set the evacuation, filling and test times for atmospheric or mains pressure on every plant in compliance with the requirements of EN 1643. If not observed, there is a risk of impairment of safety functions.

It must be ensured that the 2 test times are correctly set. It is to be checked whether the gas required for the test may be fed into the combustion chamber (on the relevant application). The test times are safety-related. After a reset and in the case of aborted or prevented valve proving, the unit will perform valve proving the next time it is started up (only when valve proving is activated). In the case of valve proving, prepurging is active during the startup phase, even if it has been deactivated. Examples of aborted valve proving: When the safety loop or the start prevention input for gas (containing pressure switch-min) opens during valve proving. Valve proving – calculation of leakage rate (PG - Pw) • V • 3600

tTest =

Patm • QLeck QLeck in l/h Leakage rate in liters per hour

PG in mbar Overpressure between the valves at the beginning of the test phase

PW in mbar Overpressure set on the pressure switch (normally 50%

of the gas inlet pressure)

Patm in mbar Absolute air pressure (1013 mbar normal pressure)

V in l Volume between the valves (test volume) including valve volume

and pilot pipe, if present (Gp1 mod)

tTest in s Test time

Page 154: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

154/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 19 PME73.840... 29.11.2011

19.3 Connection diagram for LME73.000... with actuator SQM4... (example 1)

Note: The connection diagram shown is merely an example which must be verified in the individual case depending on the application!

PME73.840... 1-stage modulating With/without pilot ignition With/without valve proving

X3X2X1 12 3

VIV

III

5

M

III

VI

2134123 4 56

I

VIVIV

III

II

7105

d45

e/10

09

X2-09

SA

-ZS

A-K

LS

A-N

LS

A-R PE

Inpu

t Db

r3 fo

r P

VO

utpu

t P

V

Figure 81: Connection diagram for LME73.000... with actuator SQM4... (example 1)

Page 155: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

155/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 19 PME73.840... 29.11.2011

19.4 Connection diagram for LME73.000... without actuator SQM4...

Note: The connection diagram shown is merely an example which must be verified in the individual case depending on the application!

PME73.840... 1-stage With/without pilot ignition With/without valve proving Without actuator

X2-09

SA

-ZS

A-K

LS

A-N

LS

A-R PE

Inpu

t Db

r3 fo

r P

VO

utpu

t P

V

710

5d3

8e/1

00

9

Figure 82: Connection diagram for LME73.000... without actuator SQM4...

When using the LME73.000... without actuator according to application Gas direct

ignition (G), 1-stage, gas direct ignition 1 (G), 1-stage, with valve proving, wire link Dbr4 must be fitted to the actuator’s X2-09 as shown above

Parameter P515.01 must be set to 0

Page 156: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

156/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 19 PME73.840... 29.11.2011

19.5 Time table and settings for program sequence PME73.840... Type Times in seconds

PME73.840... tw TSA max.

t1 P225 4)

min.

t3 P226 min.

t3n P257

approx.

t4 P230min.

t5 P232min.

t8 P234 5)

min.

t9 P231

approx.

t10 P224

approx.

t11 P259

approx.

t12 P260

approx. t22 1) 2) 3)

td1 td2 min.

td3 td4

max. Requirement 2.5 3 30 6 2,5 9 8.5 15 3 15 300 300 t9+1 --- --- --- 10 3

Factory setting --- t3n+0.45 29.106+2.1 6.174 2.205+0.3 9.408 8.82 19.404 2.646 13.818 300.762 300.762 --- --- --- --- 10.29 2.646 Max. 2.5 14 1237+2.1 37.485 13.23+0.3 74.97 74.97 1237 74.97 13.818 1237 1237 --- 1 0.45 0.45 37.485 2.646 Min. --- --- 0+2.1 1.029 0+0.3 3.234 2.058 0 0 0 0 0 --- 0.3 0.3 --- 1.029 0

Step size --- --- 4.851 0.147 0.147 0.294 0.294 4.851 0.294 0.294 4.851 4.851 --- --- --- --- 0.147 0.147 Function parameter Parameter number Factory setting Repetition in the event of loss of flame during operation <2: None = 2: 1 x

P240 0

Valve proving 0: Inactive 1: Active

P241.00 1

Valve proving 0: During prepurge time 1: During postpurge time

P241.01 1

Valve proving 0: According to P241.01 1: During prepurge time and postpurge time

P241.02 0

Actuator position during prepurge time and postpurge time 0: Purging in low-fire 1: Purging in high-fire

P515.00 1

Application with/without actuator 0: Without actuator 1: With actuator

P515.01 1

Legend

tw Waiting time t10 Specified time air pressure switch state message (timeout) TSA Safety time t11 Opening time of actuator (timeout) t1 Prepurge time t12 Closing time of actuator (timeout) t3 Pre ignition time t22 2nd safety time t3n Postignition time (P257 +0.3 seconds) t4 Interval: End of safety time - fuel valve 1 ON td1 Test atmospheric pressure t5 Interval: Pilot valve OFF - load controller release td2 Test gas pressure t8 Postpurge time td3 Test space filling t9 Interval: Fuel valve 1 ON - pilot valve OFF td4 Test space evacuating

1) Response time to a change of signal by the air pressure switch (opens) and response time in the event of loss of flame 2) Response time to a change of signal by the inputs (e.g. pressure switch-min) 3) Flame detection time 4) Minimum time td1 + td2 + td3 + td4 if: Parameter P241.00 = 1 (ON), after mains ON, with lockout, P234 (postpurge time) = 0 (postpurging) or P241.01 = 0 5) Minimum time td1 + td2 + td3 + td4 if: Parameter P241.00 = 1 (ON) and P234 (postpurge time) >0 (postpurging) and P241.01 = 1

Page 157: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

157/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 19 PME73.840... 29.11.2011

19.6 LME73.000...: Inputs and outputs/internal connection diagram

Figure 83: LM73.000...: Inputs and outputs/internal connection diagram

Page 158: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

158/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 19 PME73.840... 29.11.2011

19.7 Parameter list PME73.840... (AZL2...)

Value range Parameter

number

Parameter Edit

Min. Max.

Resolution Factory setting Password level

reading from level

Password level

writing from level

000 Internal parameter

41 Heating engineer's password (4 characters) Edit xxxx xxxx --- --- --- OEM

42 OEM's password (5 characters) Edit xxxxx xxxxx --- --- --- OEM

60 Backup/restore Edit Restore Backup --- --- --- SO

100 General

102 Identification date Read only --- --- --- --- Info ---

103 Identification number Read only 0 9999 1 0 Info ---

113 Burner identification Edit x xxxxxxxx 1 burnErId Info SO

140 Mode display of display and operating unit AZL2...

1 = standard (program phase)

2 = flame 1 (QRA.../ION)

3 = flame 2 (QRB.../QRC...) not used

4 = active power (power value)

Edit 1 4 1 1 SO SO

164 Number of startups resettable Resettable 0 999999 1 0 Info Info

166 Total number of startups Read only 0 999999 1 0 Info ---

170.00 Switching cycles actuator relay K12 Read only 0 999999 1 0 Info ---

170.01 Switching cycles actuator relay K11 Read only 0 999999 1 0 Info ---

170.02 Switching cycles actuator relay contact 2 Read only 0 999999 1 0 Info ---

170.03 Switching cycles actuator relay contact 1 Read only 0 999999 1 0 Info ---

171 Max. switching cycles actuator relay Read only 0 999999 1 0 Info ---

Page 159: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

159/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 19 PME73.840... 29.11.2011

Value range Parameter

number Parameter Edit

Min. Max.

Resolution Factory setting Password level reading from level

Password level writing from level

200 Burner control

224 Specified time air pressure switch Edit 0 s 13.818 s 0.294 s 13.818 s SO OEM 225 Prepurge time -2,1 seconds Edit 0 s 1237 s 4.851 s 29.106 s SO OEM 226 Preignition time Edit 1.029 s 37.485 s 0.147 s 6.174 s SO OEM 230 Interval: End of safety time - fuel valve 1 ON Edit 3.234 s 74.97 s 0.294 s 9.408 s SO OEM 231 Interval: Fuel valve 1 ON - pilot valve OFF Edit 0 s 74.97 s 0.294 s 2.646 s SO OEM 232 Interval: Pilot valve OFF - load controller release Edit 2.058 s 74.97 s 0.294 s 8.820 s SO OEM 234 Postpurge time Edit 0 s 1237 s 4.851 s 19.404 s SO OEM 240 Repetition in the event of loss of flame during operation

0 = none 1 = none 2 = 1 x Repetition

Edit 0 2 1 0 SO OEM

241.00 Valve proving 0 = OFF 1 = ON

Edit 0 1 1 1 SO OEM

241.01 Valve proving 0 = during prepurge time 1 = during postpurge time

Edit 0 1 1 1 SO OEM

241.02 Valve proving 0 = according to P241.01 1 = during prepurge time and postpurge time

Edit 0 1 1 0 SO OEM

242 Valve proving test space filling Edit 0 s 2.648 s 0.147 s 2.648 s SO OEM 243 Valve proving time test atmospheric pressure Edit 1.029 s 37.485 s 0.147 s 10.290 s SO OEM 244 Valve proving test space evacuating Edit 0 s 2.648 s 0.147 s 2.648 s SO OEM

245 Valve proving time test gas pressure Edit 1.029 s 37.485 s 0.147 s 10.290 s SO OEM 247 Continuous pilot (during operation)

0 = OFF 1 = ON

Edit 0 1 1 0 SO OEM

257 Postignition time -0.3 seconds Edit 0 s 13.23 s 0.147 s 2.205 s SO OEM 259 Opening time of actuator (timeout) Edit 0 s 1237 s 4.851 s 300.762 s SO OEM

260 Closing time of actuator (timeout) Edit 0 s 1237 s 4.851 s 300.762 s SO OEM 515.00 Actuator position during prepurge time and postpurge time

0: Purging in low-fire 1: Purging in high-fire

Edit 0 1 1 1 SO OEM

515.01 Application with/without actuator 0: Without actuator 1: With actuator

Edit 0 1 1 1 SO OEM

Page 160: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

160/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 19 PME73.840... 29.11.2011

Parameter Parameter Edit Value range Resolution Factory setting Password level Password level

number Min. Max. reading from level writing from level

700 Error history

701 Current error:

00: Error code

01: Startup meter reading

02: MMI phase

03: Power value

Read only

2

0

---

0%

255

999999

---

100%

1

1

---

1

--- Service ---

702 Error history former 1:

00: Error code

01: Startup meter reading

02: MMI phase

03: Power value

Read only

2

0

---

0%

255

999999

---

100%

1

1

---

1

--- Service ---

711 Error history former 10:

00: Error code

01: Startup meter reading

02: MMI phase

03: Power value

Read only

2

0

---

0%

255

999999

---

100%

1

1

---

1

--- Service ---

900 Process data

936 Normalized speed Read only 0% 100% 0,01% --- Service ---

951 Mains voltage Read only 0 V LME73.000A1: 175 V

LME73.000A2: 350 V

1 V --- Service ---

954 Flame intensity Read only 0% 100% 1% --- Service ---

Page 161: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

161/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 20 Legend 29.11.2011

20 Legend AL Alarm device AUX Auxiliary output Dbr Wire link

/reset (EK1) Lockout reset button (info button)

EK2 Remote lockout reset button FSV Flame signal amplifier ION Ionization probe K... Relay contact LED 3-color signal lamp LP Air pressure switch LR Load controller LR-OPEN Load controller OPEN position LR-CLOSE Load controller CLOSED position M Fan motor NT Power supply unit P LT Pressure switch valve proving Pmax Pressure switch-max Pmin Pressure switch-min POC Proof of closure PV Pilot valve QRA... UV flame detector R Control thermostat or pressurestat SA Actuator SA-KL Actuator low-fire SA-NL Actuator high-fire SA-R Actuator feedback SA-Z Actuator CLOSED SA-ZL Actuator ignition load SL Safety loop STB Safety limit thermostat SV Safety valve V1 Fuel valve V2 Fuel valve V2a Fuel valve W Limit thermostat or pressure switch Z Ignition transformer µC µC controller

Input/output signal 1 (ON)

Signal OFF

Input/output signal 2 (OFF)

Input permissible signal 1 (ON) or 0 (OFF)

Page 162: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

162/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 20 Legend 29.11.2011

Zeiten TSA Safety time tw Waiting time t1 Prepurge time t3 Preignition time t3n Postignition time (P257 +0.3 seconds) t4 (dependent on application)

Interval: End of safety time – fuel valve 1 ON Interval: End of safety time – fuel valve 2 ON Interval: End of safety time – load controller release

t5 Interval: Pilot valve OFF - load controller release t8 Postpurge time t9 (dependent on application)

Interval: Fuel valve 1 ON – pilot valve OFF Interval: Fuel valve 2 ON – pilot valve OFF

t10 Specified time air pressure switch state message (timeout) t11 Opening time of actuator (timeout) t12 Closing time of actuator (timeout) t22 2nd safety time td1 Test atmospheric pressure td2 Test gas pressure td3 Test space filling td4 Test space evacuating

Page 163: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

163/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 21 Multistage or modulating mode 29.11.2011

21 Multistage or modulating mode

21.1 Relevant parameters Parameter Meaning

123 Minimum power control step

259 Opening time of actuator (timeout)

260 Closing time of actuator (timeout)

654 Analog input (feedback potentiometer ASZxx.3x required) 0 = 3-position step input 1 = DC 0...10 V 2 = 0...135 3 = 0...20 mA 4 = 4...20 mA with lockout at I <4 mA (AZL2…: Loc: 60) 5 = 4...20 mA

21.1.1 Connection diagram for feedback potentiometer

ASZ12.33

Note: The connection diagram shown is merely an example which must be verified in the individual case depending on the application!

PME7...

X66

ASZ12.33

Terminal X66on the LME7...

Type

SQNx1...SQMx1...SQNx0...SQMx0...

2 (Sig

nal)

3 (GN

D)

a b ca b c

abcabc

Terminal potentiometer(1 kOhm conductive plastik 90°) ASZxx30

Rotation direction

Clo

ckw

ise

Cou

nte

r-cl

ockw

ise

XX

XX

------

------

a b c 7105d39e/1009

Figure 84: Connection diagram for feedback potentiometer ASZ12.33

Page 164: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

164/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 21 Multistage or modulating mode 29.11.2011

21.1.2 Connection diagram for load controller

Note: The connection diagram shown is merely an example which must be verified in the individual case depending on the application!

PME7...

X65

0-135

710

5d4

0/1

210

0-13

5

X65

0-10

V0-

20m

A4-

20m

A

LR

Figure 85: Connection diagram for load controller

21.2 Actuators The LME7... has terminals for the connection of electromotoric actuators for the control of air dampers and regulating dampers of oil and gas burners. Possible types of actuator:

Type Data

Sheet

Operating mode ¹) stage/modulating via 3-position step

input X5-03

Operating mode ¹) modulating via

analog input signal X65

PotentiometerASZxx.3x

SQN3... N7808 x x x

SQN7... N7804 x x x

SQM2... N7812 x x x

SQM40... SQM41...

N7817 x x x

SQM5... N7815 x x x ¹) Depending on the program sequence of LME7... or in the PME7...

21.3 Function The internal program cycle time of the LME7... is about 0.147 s ( 0.15 s). In each program sequence, each input is read and the outputs are switched on or off accordingly.

Page 165: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

165/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 21 Multistage or modulating mode 29.11.2011

21.4 Load controller inputs

21.4.1 3-position step input X5-03 The load controller input is valued by making a 2-out-of-3 section. This means that to trigger a control action via the actuator outputs, an ON or OFF signal must be identified within at least 2 successive cycles. As a result of this sampling process, an ON or OFF signal must be present for a time between minimum 0.3 seconds and maximum 0.45 seconds to produce an output signal change at the LME7...

21.4.2 Analog input X65 The LME7... handles the analog input signals with the help of an 8-bit A/D converter.

21.4.3 Selection source preset output analog/3-position step

input (P654) The following input signals can be selected and handled via parameter P654 3-position step input (feedback potentiometer ASZxx.3x required/depending on the

program sequence) 0...10 V 0...135 0...20 mA 4...20 mA with lockout at I <4 mA (AZL2...: Loc: 60) 4...20 mA

21.4.4 Actuator output X2-09 The actuators are powered by mains voltage delivered directly via the LME7...

21.4.5 Setting the maximum running time of the actuator

(P259/P260 timeout) Parameters P259 and P260 are used to set the actuator's running time in accordance with the type of actuator used. The time set must at least correspond to the running time required by the actuator to travel from the fully closed to the high-fire position (e.g. 30 seconds for 90° or more). If the actuator does not reach its position within this period of time, the LME7... will initiate lockout.

Page 166: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

166/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 21 Multistage or modulating mode 29.11.2011

21.5 Multistage/modulating mode via 3-position

step input X5-03 The signal time of a control pulse is a minimum of 147 ms.

21.5.1 Maximum possible resolution The maximum possible resolution via 3-position step input X5-03 is calculated according to the following formula: Working range in angular degrees x 0.147 s ---------------------------------------------------- = maximum possible resolution in angular degree Running time in seconds Example: Actuator, 30 seconds running time for 90° 90° x 0.147 s ------------------- = 0.441° ≈ 0.5° 30 s

21.6 Modulating mode via analog input signal

X65

21.6.1 Maximum possible resolution The maximum possible resolution of analog input signal X65 is determined via the connected ASZxx.3x feedback potentiometer. For actuators having a working range of 0...90°, the resolution is about 0.5°. For actuators having a working range of 0...135°, the resolution is about 0.8°.

21.6.2 Standardization of modulation range In the modulation range, the analog input signal is standardized. This means that the low-fire position corresponds to a preset output of 0% = 0 V-/0 mA-/4 mA-/0 input signal and the high-fire position corresponds to a preset output of 100% = 10 V-/ 20 mA-/135 input signal. The modulation range in angular degrees corresponds to the angular rotation from the low-fire to the high-fire position. Calculation: High-fire position minus low-fire position = modulation range.

Page 167: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

167/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 21 Multistage or modulating mode 29.11.2011

21.7 Setting the minimum power control step (dead band) (P123) in modulating mode via analog input signal X65

The minimum power control step must be greater than or equal to the percentage proportion of the maximum resolution of the entire modulation range (protection against hunting). Calculation: 100% x maximum resolution ---------------------------------------- = minimum power control step Modulation range Example: Actuator: 0...90° working range, resolution approx. 0.5° Modulation range: Low-fire position = 20°, high-fire position = 70° Modulation range in angular degree Calculation: 70° - 20° = 50 ° Minimum power control step Calculation: 100% x 0.5° ----------------- = 1% 50°

Note: If the value set for parameter P123 is too small, the actuator oscillates about the setpoint, leading to more running cycles, increased switching frequency and more wear and tear.

Page 168: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

168/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 22 Safety notes relating to operation of AZL2... 29.11.2011

22 Safety notes relating to operation of AZL2...

Caution! To prevent the risk of fire or explosion, damage to the heating plant or damage resulting from improper usage, following must be observed: Use the burner control covered by this Basic Documentation in compliance with the specification and only in connection with the matching burner and heating plant. If not observed, the safety functions are no longer ensured. The burner control together with the AZL2… and the plant control system must be installed and commissioned by authorized personnel. If not observed, the safety functions are no longer ensured or there will be a risk of electric shock. The AZL2… is designed for use in dry rooms only. Do not install the unit outdoors and protect it from heat, frost and liquids, such as water, oil, fuel oil, etc. If not observed, there will be a risk of electric shock. Follow strictly the operating steps and settings instructions as detailed in this Basic Documentation. Settings identified as such must only be made by authorized personnel. If not observed, the safety functions are no longer ensured. If dirty or dusty, always clean the unit with a dry cloth. Do not try to repair the unit. Such work must only be performed by authorized personnel. If not observed, there will be a risk of electric shock. If you have any other questions relating to the unit, please contact your heating engineer or get in touch with any of the Siemens addresses given in this Basic Documentation.

Page 169: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

169/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 23 Operation via AZL2… 29.11.2011

23 Operation via AZL2… 23.1 Description of the unit/display and buttons

Function and operation of versions AZL21… and AZL23… are identical.

Bild

1/0

809

P

V h min s %

VSD ESC

/reset

AF

Figure 86: Description of the unit/display and buttons

Button Function

VSD

AF

Buttons A and F: Parameterized function - For switching to parameter setting mode P

(press F and A simultaneously)

/reset

Info and Enter button - For navigation in info and service mode * For selection (symbol blinking) (press button for <1 second) * For changing to a lower menu level (press button for 1…3 seconds) * For changing to a higher menu level (press button for 3…8 seconds) * For changing to the normal display (press button for >8 seconds) - Enter in parameter setting mode - Reset in the event of fault - One menu level down

- button - For decreasing the value

+ button - One menu level down - For increasing the value

ESC

+ and - button: Escape function

(press and simultaneously) - No adoption of value - One menu level up

Page 170: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

170/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 23 Operation via AZL2… 29.11.2011

23.2 Meaning of symbols on the display

P

V h min s %

Parameter setting mode

Info mode

Service mode

Actuator closing

Actuator opening

Fan motor controlled

Oil preheater on

Heat request from controllers

Ignition controlled

Valve controlled

Flame present

Fault status message

Unit of current display

Bild

2e/

080

7

Figure 87: Meaning of display

23.3 Special functions

23.3.1 Manual lockout

/reset

plus any other button

Press /reset together with any other button. The basic unit switches instantly to the lockout position, no matter what the operating position. Display shows the fault status message. (see chapter Error code list…) Display: Loc: 167

Page 171: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

171/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 23 Operation via AZL2… 29.11.2011

23.4 Operation

Warning! Any changes to parameters and settings are only set and saved in the basic unit’s onboard memory. To save the modified settings to the program module PME7..., backup must be triggered manually. If this is not observed, there is a risk of loss of safety functions. Chapter Operation via AZL2.../backup Chapter Operation via internal LED/backup

Warning! On first startup or after exchange of the program module, the sequence of functions and parameter settings must be checked upon completion of the restore process. If this is not observed, there is a risk of loss of safety functions. See chapter Operation via AZL2.../first startup, restore See chapter Operation via internal LED/first startup, restore

Warning! If any parameters are changed, a backup must be made! If this is not observed, there is a risk of loss of safety functions.

23.4.1 Normal display

Normal display is the standard display in normal operation, representing the highest menu level. From the normal display, you can change to the info, service or parameter level.

23.4.1.1. Display in standby mode

Unit is in standby mode.

P

V h min s %

Bild

9/0

707

Note: OFF flashes when manual OFF function or manual control is active, and when controller is OFF.

23.4.1.2. Display during startup/shutdown Display of program phases

The unit is in Phase 30. The controller calls for heat. The bar below the and symbol appears. The individual program phases and controlled components are displayed in accordance with the program sequence.

Page 172: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

172/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 23 Operation via AZL2… 29.11.2011

List of phase display (display depending on program)

Note: Display depends on program!

Phase number or 3-segment display and AZL2... display

LED Function

Standby

OFF Off Standby, waiting for heat request

Ph08 Off Power ON/test phase (e.g. detector test)

Startup

Ph21 Yellow Safety valve ON, air pressure switch test/POC test (timeout/locking after 5 seconds), actuator opens in low-fire position/CLOSE position

Ph22 Yellow Fan motor ON or air pressure switch test/settling time

Ph24 Yellow Actuator travels to the prepurge position

Ph30 Yellow Prepurging

Ph36 Yellow Actuator closes until ignition load/low-fire is reached, and parameter 259.02: Actuator opens to a position > ignition load

Ph38 Yellow flashing Preignition

Ph40 Yellow flashing 1st safety time/ignition transformer ON

Ph42 Green Safety time (ignition transformer OFF), flame check

Ph44 Green Interval: End of safety time and fuel valve 1 ON Interval: End of safety time and load controller release Interval: End of safety tiem and fuel valve 2 ON

Ph50 Green 2nd safety time

Ph54 Green P259.01: Actuator opens to a position > low-fire

Ph54 Green P260: Actuator closes until low-fire position is reached

oP1 Green Interval to release of preset load controller (analog or 3-position step input)

Operation

oP Green Operation, modulating operation

oP1 Green Operation first stage

oP2 Green Operation second stage

Shutdown

Ph10 Yellow Shutdown, actuator travels to the CLOSED position (home run)

Ph72 Yellow Actuator opens until high-fire position/operation shutdown is reached

Ph74 Yellow Postpurging

Valve proving

Ph80 Yellow Test space is evacuated

Ph81 Yellow Checking time fuel valve 1

Ph82 Yellow Test space is filled

Ph83 Yellow Checking time fuel valve 2

Waiting phases (start prevention)

Ph01 Red/yellow flashing Undervoltage

Ph02 Yellow Safety loop open

Ph04 Red/green flashing Extraneous light on burner startup (timeout/locking after 30 seconds)

Ph90 Yellow Pressure switch-min open safety shutdown

Lockout

LOC Red Lockout phase

Page 173: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

173/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 23 Operation via AZL2… 29.11.2011

23.4.1.3. Display of operating position

P

V h min s %

Bild

14

/070

7

Display oP: P1 means stage 1. Display after oP is unit-specific.

Display oP: P2 means stage 2. Display after oP is unit-specific.

Display oP: means modulating operation. Display after oP: is unit-specific. Display shows the relative value of the actual position of actuator (51). Position of actuator 0° = 0 value of potentiometer = 0% display. Position of actuator high-fire >0° = >0 <1000 value of potentiometer = 100% display.

Page 174: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

174/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 23 Operation via AZL2… 29.11.2011

23.4.1.4. Fault status messages, display of errors and info Display of errors (faults) with lockout

P

V h min s %

Bild

18

5/11

07

Display shows Loc:. The bar under the fault status message appears. Unit is in the lockout position. The current error code is displayed (see chapter Blink code table). Example: Error code 7

Reset

/reset 1 s

P

V h min s %B

ild 1

9/0

707

When pressing /reset for 1 second, rESEt appears on the display. When the button is released, the basic unit is reset.

/reset < 3 s

P

V h min s %

Bild

20

/070

7

P

V h min s %

Bild

21

/070

7

P

V h min s %

Bild

22

/070

7

When pressing /reset for > 3 seconds, the display shows InFo, SEr and then OPErAtE. When the button is released, the basic unit is reset.

Note: For meaning of the error and diagnostic codes, see chapter Error code list… When an error has been acknowledged, it can still be read out from the error history.

Page 175: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

175/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 23 Operation via AZL2… 29.11.2011

23.5 Menu-driven operation

23.5.1 Assignment of levels

The various levels can be accessed via different button combinations. The parameter level can only be accessed by entering a password.

Normal display

>1 s

>1 s

Operate

>3 s<8 s

>8 s

Info level

Service level

Parameter level

Operate

>8 s

or

orautomatic

return after 120 s

/reset

/reset

/reset

Figure 88: Assignment of levels

Page 176: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

176/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 23 Operation via AZL2… 29.11.2011

23.6 Info level The info level displays information about the basic unit and operation in general.

Note:

On the info level, you can press or to display the next or the previous parameter.

In place of the button, you can also press /reset for <1 second.

Note:

You can press

ESC

or /reset for > 8 seconds to return to the normal display.

P

V h min s %

Bild

27

e/08

07

Parameter Parameter value

Figure 89: Info level

Note: No change of value on the info level. If the display shows ._._ together with the parameter, the value may consist of more than 5 digits.

When pressing /reset for > 1 second and < 3 seconds, the value will be displayed.

By pressing /reset for > 3 seconds or

ESC

, you return to the selection of the parameter no. (parameter number blinks).

No. Parameter

Info level 102 Identification date 103 Identification number 113 Burner identification 123 Minimum power control step 140 Mode display of display and operating unit AZL2...

1 = standard (program phase) 2 = flame 1 (QRA.../ION) 3 = flame 2 (QRB.../QRC...) not used 4 = active power (power value)

164 Number of startups resettable 166 Total number of startups 170.00 Switching cycles relay K12 170.01 Switching cycles relay K11 170.02 Switching cycles relay contact 2 170.03 Switching cycles relay contact 1 171 Max. switching cycles relay End

Page 177: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

177/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 23 Operation via AZL2… 29.11.2011

23.6.1 Display of info level

/reset 1…3 s

P

V h min s %

Bild

28

/070

7

Press /reset until InFo appears.

When releasing /reset, you are on the info level.

23.6.2 Display of info values 23.6.2.1. Identification date

P

V h min s %

Bild

29/

070

7

On the left, parameter 102: is displayed blinking.

On the right, ._._ is displayed.

Example: 102: ._._

/reset 1…3 s

P

V h min s %

Bild

30

/070

7

Press /reset for 1…3 seconds to display the identification date DD.MM.YY.

Example: Identification date 03.11.05

/reset or ESC

P

V h min s %

Bild

29/

070

7

Press /reset or

ESC

to return to the display of parameters.

To the next parameter

23.6.2.2. Identification number

P

V h min s %

Bild

31/

070

7

On the left, parameter 103: is displayed blinking. On the right, identification number 0 appears.

Example: 103: 0

To the next parameter

or /reset for < 1 s

Back to the previous parameter

Page 178: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

178/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 23 Operation via AZL2… 29.11.2011

23.6.2.3. Identification of burner

P

V h min s %

Bild

32

/070

7

On the left, parameter 113: (108 with sample units) is displayed blinking. On the right, ._._ appears.

Example: 113: ._._

/reset 1…3 s

P

V h min s %

Bild

33

/070

7

Press /reset for 1…3 seconds to display the burner’s identification. Factory setting: - - - - - - - - Example: 3

P

V h min s %

Bild

16

2/11

07

burnEr Id can only be changed with the ACS410 PC software diagnostic tool.

/reset or ESC

P

V h min s %

Bild

32

/070

7

Press /reset or

ESC

to return to the display of parameters.

To the next parameter

Back to the previous parameter

Page 179: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

179/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 23 Operation via AZL2… 29.11.2011

23.6.2.4. Number of startups resettable

Note: Can be deleted for service (see chapter Parameter list)!

P

V h min s %

Bild

34/

070

7

On the left, parameter 164: is displayed blinking. On the right, characters ._._ appear.

Example: Parameter 164: ._._

/reset

1…3 s

P

V h min s %

Bild

201

/10

08

Press /reset for 1…3 seconds to display the number of startups (resettable).

Example: 000036

/reset

3…8 s

P

V h min s %

Bio

d 7

3/0

707

Press /reset for 3…8 seconds to go to the range that can be changed.

Digit 0 blinks.

/reset

P

V h min s %

Bild

16

3/11

07

By pressing /reset, the number of startups is reset to 0.

Display: 000000

/reset or ESC

P

V h min s %

Bild

34/

070

7

Press /reset or

ESC

to show parameter 164 blinking again.

To the next parameter

Back to the previous parameter

Page 180: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

180/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 23 Operation via AZL2… 29.11.2011

23.6.2.5. Total number of startups

P

V h min s %

Bild

36/

070

7

On the left, parameter 166: is displayed blinking. On the right, characters ._._ appear. Example: Parameter 166: ._._

/reset 1…3 s

P

V h min s %

Bild

202

/10

08

Press /reset for 1…3 seconds to display the total number of startups.

Example: 000056

/reset or ESC

P

V h min s %

Bild

36/

070

7

Press /reset or

ESC

to go back to the display of parameters.

To the next parameter

Back to the previous parameter

23.6.2.6. End of info level

P

V h min s %

Bild

38

/070

7

When this display appears, you have reached the end of the info level.

Display shows – End – blinking.

To start of info level To end of info level

ESC

or

/reset >8 s

P

V h min s %

Bild

22

/070

7

Press

ESC

or nfo to return to standby mode.

Display shows OPErAtE.

P

V h min s %

Bild

9/0

707

When this display appears, you are back on the normal display and you can change to the next level mode.

/reset

Press /reset to switch between the service and the parameter level.

Page 181: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

181/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 23 Operation via AZL2… 29.11.2011

23.7 Service level

The service level is used to display information about errors including the error history.

Note:

When on the service level, you can press or to display the next or the previous parameter.

Instead of pressing , you can also press /reset for < 1 second.

Note:

Press

ESC

or /reset for > 8 seconds to return to the normal display.

Parameter Parameter value Figure 90: Servic level

Note: No change of values on the service level. If characters are displayed by the parameter, the value may consist of more than 5 digits.

Press /reset for >1 s and <3 s to display the value.

Press /reset for >3 s or

ESC

to return to the selection of the parameter number (flashing).

23.7.1 Display of the service level

/reset

P

V h min s %

Bild

21

/070

7

Press /reset for > 3 s until SEr appears.

When releasing /reset, you are on the service level.

No. Parameter Service level 920 Current PWM signal fan 936 Normalized speed 951 Mains voltage 954 Flame intensity

Page 182: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

182/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 23 Operation via AZL2… 29.11.2011

23.7.2 Display of service values 23.7.2.1. Error history

See Parameter with index, with or without direct display/Example of parameter 701 Error history.

Note Can be deleted for service (see chapter Parameter list)!

23.7.2.2. Mains voltage

P

V h min s %

Bild

21

1/10

08

Parameter 951: appears blinking. Mains voltage is displayed on the right. Example: 951: 120

To the next parameter Back to the previous parameter

23.7.2.3. Intensity of flame

P

V h min s %

Bild

20

3/10

08

Display shows parameter 954: blinking. On the right, the intensity of the flame is displayed in 0...100%. Example: 954: 0

End of service level – End – Back to the previous parameter

23.7.2.4. End of service level

P

V h min s %

Bild

38

/070

7

When this display appears, you have reached the end of the service level. Display shows – End – blinking.

To the start of the service level

To the end of the service level

ESC

P

V h min s %

Bild

22

/070

7

Press

ESC

to return to standby mode. Display shows OPErAtE.

P

V h min s %

Bild

9/0

707

When this display appears, you are back on the normal display and you can change to the next level mode.

Page 183: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

183/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 23 Operation via AZL2… 29.11.2011

23.8 Parameter level

The parameters stored in the basic unit can be displayed or changed on the parameter level. The change to the parameter level requires entry of a password.

Siemens supplies the LME7... with the factory settings according to Type summary. The OEM can change the Siemens factory settings to match its own requirements. With the LME7..., the burner control’s characteristics are determined primarily through parameterization. Every time the unit is recommissioned, the parameter settings must be checked. The LME7... must never be transferred from one plant to another without matching the parameters to the new plant.

Caution! Parameters and settings may only be changed by qualified personnel. If parameters are changed, responsibility for the new parameter settings is assumed by the person who – in accordance with the access rights – has made parameter changes on the respective access level. After parameterization, the OEM must check to ensure that safe burner operation will be warranted. The OEM which made the settings is always responsible for the parameters, their settings and compliance of the respective application with the relevant national and international standards and safety regulations, such as EN 676, EN 267, EN 1643, etc. Siemens, its suppliers and other Group Companies of Siemens AG do not assume responsibility for special or indirect damage, consequential damage, other damage, or damage resulting from wrong parameterization.

Warning!

If the factory settings are changed, all changes made must be documented and checked by the OEM. The OEM is obliged to mark the unit accordingly and to include at least the list of device parameters and settings in the burner’s documentation. Siemens also recommends attaching an additional mark on the LME7... in the form of an adhesive label. According to EN 298, the label should be easy to read and wipeproof. The label with a maximum size of 50 mm x 40 mm can be attached to the upper part of the housing.

Example of label: OEM logo

Type/part no.: 1234567890ABCD CAUTION! OEM settings:

Parameter no.

225 = 30 s (t1)

234 = 0 s (t8)

257 = 2 s (t3n) TSA = t3n + 0.45 s

259 = 30 s (t11)

Page 184: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

184/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 23 Operation via AZL2… 29.11.2011

23.8.1 Entering the password

Note: The OEM password must consist of 5 characters, that for the heating engineer of 4 characters.

VSD

AF > 1 s

P

V h min s %

Bild

42

/070

7

Press button combination

VSD

AF to display CodE.

P

V h min s %

Bild

43

/070

7

When releasing the buttons, 6 bars appear the first of which blinks.

or

P

V h min s %B

ild 4

4/0

707

Press or to select a numeral or letter.

/reset

or

P

V h min s %

Bild

45

/070

7

Press /reset to confirm the entry. The value entered changes to a minus sign (–). The next bar starts blinking.

/reset

or

P

V h min s %

Bild

46/

070

7

Press or to select a numeral or letter.

/reset

P

V h min s %

Bild

47

/070

7

After entry of the last character, the password

must be confirmed by pressing /reset.

Press /reset again to finish entry of the password. Example: Password consisting of 4 characters.

Page 185: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

185/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 23 Operation via AZL2… 29.11.2011

P

V h min s %

Bild

48

/070

7

As a confirmation of correct entry, PArA appears for a maximum of 2 seconds.

Note: For the entry of passwords or burner IDs, the following numerals and letters can be used:

= 1

= A

= L

= 2

= b

= n

= 3

= C

= o

= 4

= d

= P

= 5

= E

= r

= 6

= F

= S

= 7

= G

= t

= 8

= H

= u

= 9

= I

= Y

= 0

= J

Page 186: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

186/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 23 Operation via AZL2… 29.11.2011

23.8.2 Changing the heating engineer's password

Note:

For the OEM to change the heating engineer’s password, c: demands entry of the OEM password!

P

V h min s %

Bild

56/

070

7

Parameter 041: blinks.

Press /reset to go to level c: for password changes.

/reset

P

V h min s %B

ild 1

64/1

107

Letter c: for confirmation appears blinking. Proceed as described in section Entering the password and enter the former password. After entry of the last character, the password must be

confirmed by pressing /reset.

/reset

P

V h min s %

Bild

57/

070

7

Letter n: for new appears blinking. Proceed as described in section Entering the password and enter the new password (4 characters). After entry of the last character, the password must be

confirmed by pressing /reset.

/reset

P

V h min s %

Bild

58/

070

7

Letter r: for repeat appears blinking. Proceed as described in section Entering the password and repeat entry of the new password. After entry of the last character, the password must be

confirmed by pressing /reset.

P

V h min s %

Bild

59

/070

7

SEt confirms that the new password has been saved.

P

V h min s %

Bild

56/

070

7

Parameter 041: blinks again.

Page 187: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

187/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 23 Operation via AZL2… 29.11.2011

23.8.3 Changing the OEM's password

P

V h min s %

Bild

60/

070

7

Parameter 042: blinks.

Press /reset to go to level c: for password changes.

/reset

P

V h min s %

Bild

165

/11

07

Letter c: for confirmation appears blinking. Proceed as described in section Entering the password and enter the former password. After entry of the last character, the password must be

confirmed by pressing /reset.

/reset

P

V h min s %

Bild

60/

070

7

Letter n: for new appears blinking. Proceed as described in section Entering the password and enter the new password (5 characters). After entry of the last character, the password must be

confirmed by pressing /reset.

/reset

P

V h min s %

Bild

62/

070

7

Letter r: for repeat appears blinking. Proceed as described in section Entering the password and repeat entry of the new password. After entry of the last character, the password must be

confirmed by pressing /reset.

P

V h min s %

Bild

59

/070

7

SEt confirms that the new password has been saved.

P

V h min s %

Bild

60/

070

7

Parameter 042: blinks again.

Page 188: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

188/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 23 Operation via AZL2… 29.11.2011

23.8.4 Backup

Parameter 000: blinks. Display: Parameter 000: blinks, display Int does not

/reset

Press /reset for parameter group 041. Display: Parameter 041: blinks, display ._._ does not

Press for parameter 060. Display: Parameter 060. blinks, index 00: and value 0 do not

/reset

Press /reset for parameter rEStorE. Display: Parameter rEStorE blinks

Press for parameter bAC_UP. Display: Parameter bAC_UP blinks

/reset

Press /reset for the backup process. Display: Value 0

Press to shift the value to change mode one place to the left. Display: Value 0 blinks

Note: To identify display faults, the value changes one place to the left.

Page 189: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

189/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 23 Operation via AZL2… 29.11.2011

Press for value 1. Display: Value 1 blinks

/reset

Press /reset to activate the backup process. Display shows run

<3 s

After approx. 3 seconds (depending on the duration of the program sequence), the displays shows bAC End and signals the end of the backup process. Display: bAC End

It will now be displayed for 2 minutes, or can be finished by pressing the /reset button

<2 min

or

/reset

Display shows OFF when the backup process is finished.

Note: During backup, all settings and parameters are transferred from the basic unit’s memory to the memory of the program module.

Warning! If any parameters are changed, a backup must be made! If this is not observed, there is a risk of loss of safety functions.

Page 190: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

190/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 23 Operation via AZL2… 29.11.2011

23.8.5 Restore

Parameter 000: blinks. Display: Parameter 000: blinks, display Int dos not

/reset

Press /reset for parameter group 041. Display: Parameter 041: blinks, display ._._ does not.

Press for parameter 060. Display: Parameter 060. blinks, index 00: and value 0 do not.

/reset

Press /reset for parameter rEStorE. Display: Parameter rEStorE blinks.

/reset

Press /reset to select the restore process. Display: value 0

Press to shift the value to change mode one place to the left. Display: Value 0 blinks

Note: For realizing display faults, the value change one place to the left.

Press for value 1. Display: Value 1 blinks.

Page 191: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

191/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 23 Operation via AZL2… 29.11.2011

/reset

Press /reset to activate the restore process. Display shows run

<3 s

After approx. 3 seconds (depending on the duration of the program sequence), the displays shows rSt End and signaled the end of the restore process. Display: rSt End

It will now be displayed for 2 minutes, or can be finished by pressing the /reset button

<2 min

or

/reset

Display shows OFF when the restore process is finished.

Note: During the restore process, all settings and parameters are written from the program module to the basic unit’s onboard memory. In the process, it is possible that previous program sequences, parameters and settings in the onboard memory will be overwritten!

Warning! On first startup or after exchange of the program module, the sequence of functions and parameter settings must be checked upon completion of the restore process. If this is not observed, there is a risk of loss of safety functions. See chapter Operation via AZL2.../first startup, restore See chapter Operation via internal LED/first startup, restore

Page 192: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

192/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 23 Operation via AZL2… 29.11.2011

23.9 Operating variants of the parameters

The parameters stored in the burner control LME7... can be displayed and changed on the parameter level.

23.9.1 Parameters without index, with direct display 23.9.1.1. Example of parameter 225 (prepurge time) on the parameter level

P

V h min s %

Bild

16

6/11

07

Press for prepurge time. Display: Parameter 225: blinks, value 3.675 does not.

/reset

P

V h min s %B

ild 1

67/

110

7

Press /reset for editing mode. Display: 3.675

Press or to shift the former prepurge time to change mode one place to the left. Display: Prepurge time 3.675 blinks. or

P

V h min s %

Bild

16

8/11

07

Note: To detect display errors, the value appears one place shifted to the left.

or

P

V h min s %

Bild

16

9/11

07

Press or for the required prepurge time. Display: Prepurge time 3.822 blinks.

Page 193: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

193/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 23 Operation via AZL2… 29.11.2011

Alternative 1:

Discard the change!

ESC

P

V h min s %

Bild

16

6/11

07

Alternative 2:

Adopt the value!

/reset

Press /reset to return to editing mode. The value set will be adopted. Note: To detect display errors, the value appears one place shifted to the right.

P

V h min s %

Bild

17

0/11

07

Display: Value 3.822

ESC

P

V h min s %

Bild

212

/10

08

To the next parameter

Back to the previous parameter

Page 194: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

194/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 23 Operation via AZL2… 29.11.2011

23.9.2 Parameters without index, with no direct display 23.9.2.1. Example of parameter 224 (specified time air pressure switch) on the

parameter level

P

V h min s %

Bild

17

2/11

07

Press for specified time for air pressure signal.

Display: Parameter 224: blinks, characters ._._ do not.

/reset

P

V h min s %

Bild

17

3/11

07

Press /reset for editing mode.

Display: 48.510

Press or to shift the former specified time to change mode one place to the left. Display: Specified time 48.510 blinks.

or

P

V h min s %

Bild

17

4/11

07

Note To detect display errors, the value appears one place shifted to the left.

or

P

V h min s %

Bild

17

5/11

07

Press or to set the specified time.

Display: Specified time 53.361 blinks.

Page 195: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

195/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 23 Operation via AZL2… 29.11.2011

Alternative 1:

Discard the change!

ESC

P

V h min s %

Bild

17

2/11

07

Alternative 2:

Adopt the change!

/reset

Press /reset to return to editing mode. The value set will be adopted. Note: To detect display errors, the value is shown again, but shifted one place to the right.

P

V h min s %

Bild

17

6/11

07

Display: Value 53.361

ESC

P

V h min s %

Bild

17

2/11

07

Press

ESC

to return to the parameter level.

Display: Parameter 224: blinks, characters ._._ do not.

To the next parameter

Back to the previous parameter

Page 196: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

196/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 23 Operation via AZL2… 29.11.2011

23.9.3 Parameters with index, with or without direct display 23.9.3.1. Example of parameter 701: Actual error on the service level

See chapter Error code list!

P

V h min s %

Bild

20

4/10

08

Press to select parameter 701.

Display: Parameter 701. blinks, index 00: and error 4 do not.

P

V h min s %

Bild

20

4/10

08

On the left, the current error 701. appears blinking, index 00: does not blink. On the right, error code 4 is displayed. Example: Parameter 701., index 00:, error code 4.

/reset 1…3 s

P

V h min s %

Bild

20

5/10

08

Press /reset for 1…3 seconds to show index 00: for the error code blinking. Display: Parameter 701. does not blink, index 00: blinks, error 4 does not blink.

To the next index

P

V h min s %

Bild

20

6/10

08

Press to select the index. .00 = error code .01 = startup meter reading .02 = MMI phase to the time of fault .03 = power value to the time of fault Example Parameter 701., index 01:, startup meter reading._._

To the next index

Page 197: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

197/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 23 Operation via AZL2… 29.11.2011

P

V h min s %

Bild

20

7/10

08

Press to select the index. .02 = MMI phase to the time of fault Example: Parameter 701., index 02:, Phase 02 = safety shutdown

To the next index

P

V h min s %

Bild

20

8/10

08

Press to select the index. .03 = power value to the time of fault Example: Parameter 701., index 03:, power value 60%

/reset 1…3 s

P

V h min s %

Bild

20

9/10

08

Press

ESC

to return to the index. Display: Parameter 701. does not blink, index 03: blinks,

characters ._._ do not.

To the next index

Back to the previous index

P

V h min s %

Bild

18

0/1

107

When this display appears, you have reached the end of the index level within parameter 701. Display – End – appears blinking.

ESC

Page 198: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

198/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 23 Operation via AZL2… 29.11.2011

P

V h min s %

Bild

17

7/1

107

Press

ESC

to return to the parameter level. Display: Parameter 701. blinks, index 01: and diagnostic code 4 do not.

To the next older error

P

V h min s %

Bild

21

0/10

08

Parameters cover the period back to the last error since deletion of the history (max. to parameter 711.) Example: Parameter 711., index 00: -

To the next parameter

Back to the previous parameter

Page 199: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

199/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 24 Error code list with operation via external AZL2... display 29.11.2011

24 Error code list with operation via external AZL2... display

Note: Display depends on program!

Error code Clear text Possible cause

bAC Er3 Fault of compatibility program module to basic unit during backup process

Program sequence of program module does not match the basic unit

Err PrC Fault of program module - Error in data content of program module - No program module fitted

Loc: 2

No establishment of flame at the end of safety time

- Faulty or soiled fuel valves - Faulty or soiled flame detector - Poor adjustment of burner, no fuel - Faulty ignition equipment

Loc: 3 Air pressure faulty (air pressure switch welded in no-load position, decrease to specified time (air pressure switch response time)

Air pressure switch faulty - Loss of air pressure signal after specified time - Air pressure switch has welded in no-load position

Loc: 4 Extraneous light Extraneous light during burner startup

Loc: 5 Air pressure faulty, air pressure switch welded in working position

Timeout air pressure switch - Air pressure switch has welded in working position

Loc: 6 Fault of actuator - Actuator faulty or blocked - Faulty connection - Wrong adjustment

Loc: 7

Loss of flame Too many losses of flame during operation (limitation of repetitions) - Faulty or soiled fuel valves - Faulty or soiled flame detector - Poor adjustment of burner

Loc: 8 --- Free

Loc: 9 --- Free

Loc: 10 Error not relatable (application), internal error Wiring error or internal error, output contacts, other

faults

Loc: 12 Valve proving Fuel valve 1 leaking

Loc: 13 Valve proving Fuel valve 2 leaking

Loc: 14 POC error Error valve closure control POC

Loc: 20 Gas pressure switch-min open Gas shortage

Loc: 22 Safety loop open - Gas pressure switch-max open - Safety limit thermostat cut out

Loc: 60 Analog power source 4...20 mA, I <4 mA Wire breakage

Loc: 83 PWM fan faulty

- PWM fan does not reach the target speed within the preset period of time, or - After reaching the target speed, the PWM fan leaves the tolerance band again (P650) for a time exceeding the tolerance time speed deviation (P660)

Loc: 138 Restore process successful Restore process successful

Loc: 139 No program module detected No program module plugged in

Loc: 167 Manual locking Manual locking

Loc: 206 AZL2... incompatible Use the latest version

Loc: 225 PWM fan faulty - Fan speed dropped below the minimum prepurge

Page 200: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

200/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 24 Error code list with operation via external AZL2... display 29.11.2011

PWM (P675.00) after reaching the prepurge speed, or - After reaching the ignition load speed, the maximum ignition load PWM (P675.01) was exceeded

Loc: 226 PWM fan faulty

Parameterization error: - Speed low-fire > speed high-fire, or - Low-fire = 0 rpm, or - Maximum speed = 0 rpm

Loc: 227 PWM fan faulty One or several parameters violate the minimum/maximum limit

rSt Er1 Error in compatibility program module to basic unit during restore process

- Program sequence of program module does not match the basic unit

rSt Er2 Error in compatibility program module to basic unit during restore process

- Hardware of basic unit does not match the program module

rSt Er3 Error during restore process - Program module faulty - Program module removed during restore process

Page 201: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

201/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 25 Operation via internal LED 29.11.2011

25 Operation via internal LED 25.1 Description of display and buttons

nfo+-A

LC

D B

ild 0

1/0

908

Figure 91: Description of display and buttons

Button Function

A

Button A - Display preset output - In lockout position: Power value to the time of fault

nfo

Info and Enter button - Reset in the event of fault, changeover visual diagnostic of the cause of fault (see chapter Diagnostics of cause of fault )

-

- button - Display flame signal current 2 or phases display - In lockout position: MMI phase to the time of fault

+

+ button - Display flame signal current 1 or phases display - In lockout position: MMI phase to the time of fault

3 multicolor signal lamp - See chapter Blink code table

-

and

+

+ and - button: Escape function

(press

-

and

+

simultaneously) - No adoption of value - One menu level up - Keep depressed for >1second for backup/restore function

Page 202: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

202/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 25 Operation via internal LED 29.11.2011

25.2 Normal display

Normal display is the standard display in normal operation.

25.2.1 Display in standby mode

LC

D B

ild 0

2/0

908

Unit is in standby mode.

25.2.2 Display during startup/shutdown 25.2.2.1. Display of program phases

LC

D B

ild 0

3/0

908

The unit is in Phase 21. The individual program phases are displayed in accordance with the program sequence. For color display of signal lamp, see List of phase display.

Page 203: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

203/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 25 Operation via internal LED 29.11.2011

25.2.2.2. List of phase display

Note: Display depends on program!

Phase number or 3-segment display and AZL2... display

LED Function

Standby

OFF Off Standby, waiting for heat request

P08 Off Power ON/test phase (e.g. detector test)

Startup

P21 Yellow Safety valve ON, air pressure switch test/POC test (timeout/locking after 5 seconds), actuator opens in low-fire position/CLOSE position

P22 Yellow Fan motor ON/air pressure switch test/settling time

P24 Yellow Actuator travels to the prepurge position

P30 Yellow Prepurging

P36 Yellow Actuator closes until ignition load/low-fire is reached, and parameter 259.02: Actuator opens to a position > ignition load

P38 Yellow flashing Preignition time

P40 Yellow flashing 1st safety time/ignition transformer ON

P42 Green Safety time (ignition transformer OFF), flame check

P44 Green Interval: End of safety time and fuel valve 1 ON Interval: End of safety time and release of load controller Interval: End of safety time and fuel valve 2 ON

P50 Green 2nd safety time

P54 Green P259.01: Actuator opens to a position > low-fire

P54 Green P260: Actuator closes until low-fire position is reached

oP1 Green Interval to release of preset load controller (analog or 3-position step input)

Operation

oP Green Operation, modulating operation

oP1 Green Operation first stage

oP2 Green Operation second stage

Shutdown

P10 Yellow Shutdown, actuator travels to the CLOSED position (home run)

P72 Yellow Actuator opens in high-fire position/operation shutdown

P74 Yellow Postpurging

Valve proving

P80 Yellow Test space is evacuated

P81 Yellow Checking time fuel valve 1

P82 Yellow Test space is filled

P83 Yellow Checking time fuel valve 2

Page 204: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

204/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 25 Operation via internal LED 29.11.2011

Phase number or 3-segment display and AZL2... display

LED Function

Waiting phases (start prevention)

P01 Red/yellow flashing Undervoltage

P02 Yellow Safety loop open Safety shutdown followed by lockout with interlocking

P04 Red/green flashing Extraneous light on burner startup (timeout/locking after 30 seconds)

P90 Yellow Pressure switch-min open Safety shutdown followed by lockout with interlocking

Lockout

LOC Red Lockout phase

Page 205: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

205/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 25 Operation via internal LED 29.11.2011

25.2.3 Display of operating position

LC

D B

ild 0

4/0

908

Display oP1 means stage 1. Display after oP is unit-specific. The signal lamp blinks green.

25.3 Special functions

25.3.1 Manual lockout

nfo

and other button

LC

D B

ild 0

6/0

908

Alternately

Press nfo simultaneously with any other button. Basic unit changes from any operating position directly to lockout. Signal lamp lights up red. Display shows current error code 167.

Page 206: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

206/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 25 Operation via internal LED 29.11.2011

25.4 Fault status messages, display of errors

25.4.1 Display of errors (faults) with lockout

LC

D B

ild 0

6/0

908

Alternately

LC

D B

ild 0

7/0

908

Display shows alternately Loc and 4. Unit is in the lockout position. The current error code is displayed and the signal lamp is blinking red. Example: Error code 4

+

or -

LC

D B

ild 0

8/0

908

Press

+

or

-

for display of the phase, where the fault appeared. Signal lamp blinks red. Example: Phase P02

A

Only with modulation via analog signal

Press

A

for display of the output position/actuator position where the error occurred. Signal lamp lights up red. Example: Output position/actuator position 49

Page 207: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

207/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 25 Operation via internal LED 29.11.2011

25.4.2 Display of flame current ION or QRA...

Note: This display is only possible in operating mode or standby!

+

LC

D B

ild 0

9/0

908

Press

+

for display of the flame signal amplifier. Signal lamp blinks green. Display shows FL.1.

+

1...3 s L

CD

Bild

10

/09

08

When pressing

+

(1…3 seconds), the flame signal current is displayed. Signal lamp blinks green. Example: 11.

+

>3 s

LC

D B

ild 1

1/0

908

When pressing

+

(>3 seconds), the point after the number begins to blink. When the button is released, the value is displayed for 2 minutes. Signal lamp blinks green. Then, the normal display appears. Display: Point . blinks, value 11 does not.

25.4.3 Reset

nfo

>1 s

LC

D B

ild 0

2/0

908

For reset the unit, press

nfo

for 1...3 seconds. When the button is released, OFF is displayed. The basic unit is reset.

Note: For meaning of the error and diagnostic codes, see chapter Error code list...

Page 208: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

208/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 25 Operation via internal LED 29.11.2011

25.4.4 Display of flame current QRB... or QRC...

Note: This display is only possible in operating mode or standby!

-

LC

D B

ild 1

2/0

908

Press

-

for display of the flame signal amplifier. Signal lamp blinks green. Display shows FL.2.

-

1...3 s

When pressing

-

(1…3 seconds), the flame signal current is displayed. Signal lamp blinks green. Example: 1.1

-

>3 s

When pressing

+

(>3 seconds), the point after the number begins to blink. When the button is released, the value is displayed for 2 minutes. Signal lamp blinks green. Then, the normal display appears. Display: Point . blinks, value 11 does not.

Page 209: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

209/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 25 Operation via internal LED 29.11.2011

25.4.5 Display of preset output

Note: Display is possible only when … in operating mode or standby, program sequence for modulating operation via analog preset output.

A

LC

D B

ild 1

3/0

908

Press

A

for display of the relative current position of the actuator. Signal lamp blinks green. Display shows .oP.

Press

A

(1…3 seconds) for display of the relative current position. Signal lamp blinks green. The relative value .57 of the current position is displayed. PME7... with actuator control: Position of actuator 0° 0 value of potentiometer = 0% display Position of actuator high-fire >0° <90° = value of potentiometer <1000 = 100% display >0 <1000

PME7... with PWM fan: Current speed 0 rpm = 0% display Current speed corresponds to the rated load speed = 100% display

A

1...3 s

Example: Value .57

A

>3 s

When pressing

+

for >3 seconds, the point after the number begins to blink. When the button is released, the value is displayed for 2 minutes. Signal lamp blinks green. Then, the normal display appears. Display: Value 57, point . blinks.

Page 210: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

210/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 25 Operation via internal LED 29.11.2011

25.5 Manual adjustment (depending on program module)

25.5.1 Position of actuator or speed of PWM fan in modulating operation with analog signal

Note: Display is possible only when … in operating mode or standby, program sequence for modulating operation via analog preset output and with connected

actuator with potentiometer for position feedback to the LME7...

A

LC

D B

ild 1

3/0

908

Press

A

for the relative current position of the actuator or the relative current speed of the PWM fan. Signal lamp blinks green. Display shows .oP.

Press

A

(1…3 seconds) for display of the relative current position or the current speed. Signal lamp blinks green. The relative value .57 of the current position is displayed. Position of actuator 0° 0 value of potentiometer = 0% display Position of actuator high-fire >0° <90° = value of potentiometer >0 <1000 = 100% display

Actual speed 0 rpm = 0% display Current speed corresponds to the rated load speed = 100% display

A

1...3 s

Example: Value .57

A

>3 s

When pressing

A

(>3 seconds), the point after the number begins to blink. When the button is released, the value is displayed for 2 minutes. Signal lamp blinks green. Then, the normal display appears. Display: Value 57, point . blinks.

Page 211: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

211/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 25 Operation via internal LED 29.11.2011

Press

A

for >3 seconds to display alternately LoA and 41. The relative value 41 of the current position or current speed is displayed. Actuator position 0° 0 potentiometer value = 0% display Actuator position high-fire >0° <90° = potentiometer value >0 <1000 = 100% display

Current speed 0 rpm = 0% display Current speed corresponds to the rated load speed = 100% display

A

>3 s

Alternately

The actual value (example 41%) is displayed and the signal lamp blinks green. Example: Position of actuator or the current speed 41% (based on range between high-fire and 0° or 0 rpm)

A

and

+

or -

Press

A

simultaneously with

+

or

-

to adjust the actuator position or the fan speed between low-fire (x%) and high-fire (100%). Release the buttons when the required position or speed is reached. Signal lamp blinks s green. Example: Value 43

Alternately

Display shows alternately LoA and 43. Signal lamp blinks green. Example: Required position of actuator or current speed 43%

-

and

+

Press

-

and

+

simultaneously (Escape) to return to normal operation. Display: oP When manual adjustment is completed, the actuator or the PWM fan returns to the analog preset output!

Page 212: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

212/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 25 Operation via internal LED 29.11.2011

Note: When the program phase (e.g. P10 - shutdown) changes during manual adjustment, the

display blinks Manual adjustment mode remains active until Escape switches the basic unit back to

normal operation or until the basic unit is reset via mains ON/OFF. This means that in the case of a new heat request and after startup, the actuator or the PWM fan is driven to the position or speed of the manually preset value

Page 213: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

213/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 25 Operation via internal LED 29.11.2011

25.6 First startup with a new program module or in case of replacement of program module

Alternately

Display shows alternately rSt and PrC. Display shows the replacement of the program module. Signal lamp blinks red once and yellow twice alternately.

Press

nfo

for >3 seconds to start data download from the program module. Signal lamp blinks yellow. The process of 3 seconds is supported by a short flash of the yellow signal lamp.

nfo

>3 s

Note:

If you press

nfo

for <3 seconds, data download does not start. To start the restore process again, the LME7... must be reset by switching mains ON/OFF.

Display shows run during download (restore process) of the program sequence.

Alternately

Display shows alternately End and rSt. Display shows the end of data exchange. Signal lamp blinks red.

After 2 minutes, the unit changes to Loc 138

LC

D B

ild 0

6/0

908

Alternately

After the restore process, the unit is automatically in the lockout position (LOC 138) and must be reset for operation!

Page 214: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

214/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 25 Operation via internal LED 29.11.2011

nfo

>1 s

LC

D B

ild 0

2/0

908

Press

nfo

for >1 second to reset the unit. Display: OFF

Warning! On first startup or after exchange of the program module, the sequence of functions and parameter settings must be checked upon completion of the restore process See chapter Operation via AZL2.../first startup, restore See chapter Operation via internal LED/first startup, restore

Page 215: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

215/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 25 Operation via internal LED 29.11.2011

25.7 Manual backup

-

and

+

>1 s

Press

-

and

+

simultaneously for >1 second (Escape) to start a manual backup process. Parameter PrC appears. Display: PrC

-

or +

Press

-

or

+

for parameter bAC. Display: bAC

nfo

1…3 s

run appears during download (backup process) of the program sequence.

Alternately

Display shows alternately End and bAC. Display shows the end of data exchange.

Display appears for 2 minutes or can be finished by pressing nfo .

nfo

>1 s

LC

D B

ild 0

2/0

908

When the backup process is completed, the display shows OFF.

Press

nfo

for >1 second to reset the unit. Display: OFF

Warning! If any parameters are changed, a backup must be made!

Page 216: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

216/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 25 Operation via internal LED 29.11.2011

25.7.1 Error during backup process

Alternately

Display shows alternately bAC and Er3. For meaning of a possible cause, see chapter Error code list with operation via internal LED.

Note: During backup, all settings and parameters are transferred from the basic unit’s memory to the memory of the program module.

Page 217: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

217/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 25 Operation via internal LED 29.11.2011

25.8 Manual restore

-

and

+

>1 s

Press

-

and

+

simultaneously for >1 second (Escape) for starting the manual restore process. Parameter PrC appears. Display: PrC

-

or +

Press

-

or

+

for parameter rSt. Display: rSt

nfo

1…3 s

run appears during download (restore process) of program sequence.

Alternately

Display shows alternately End and rSt. Display shows the end of data exchange. Signal lamp blinks red.

After 2 minutes, the unit changes to Loc 138

LC

D B

ild 0

6/0

908

Alternately

After the restore process, the unit is automatically in the lockout position (LOC 138) and must be reset for operation!

nfo

>1 s

LC

D B

ild 0

2/0

908

Press

nfo

for >1 second to reset the unit. Display: OFF

Page 218: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

218/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 25 Operation via internal LED 29.11.2011

25.8.1 Errors during the restore process

Alternately with

or

or

Display shows alternately rSt and Er1, Er2 or Er3. For meaning of a possible cause, see chapter Error code list with operation via internal LED.

Note: During the restore process, all settings and parameters are written from the program module to the basic unit’s onboard memory. In the process, it is possible that previous program sequences, parameters and settings in the onboard memory will be overwritten!

25.8.2 Reset

nfo

>1 s

LC

D B

ild 0

2/0

908

When pressing

nfo

for 1...3 seconds, OFF is displayed. When the button is released, the basic unit is reset.

Note: For meaning of the error and diagnostic codes, see chapter Error code list...

Page 219: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

219/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 26 Error code list with operation via internal LED 29.11.2011

26 Error code list with operation via internal LED

Note: Display depends on program!

Error code Clear text Possible cause

bAC Er3 Fault of compatibility program module to basic unit during backup process

Program sequence of program module does not match the basic unit

Err PrC Fault of program module - Error in data content of program module - No program module fitted

Loc 2

No establishment of flame at the end of the safety time

- Faulty or soiled fuel valves - Faulty or soiled flame detector - Poor adjustment of burner, no fuel - Faulty ignition equipment

Loc 3

Air pressure faulty (air pressure switch welded in no-load position), decrease to specified time (air pressure switch) response time)

Air pressure switch faulty - Loss of air pressure signal after specified time - Air pressure switch is welded in no-load position

Loc 4 Extraneous light Extraneous light when burner startup

Loc 5 Air pressure faulty, air pressure switch welded in working position

Time out air pressure switch - Air pressure switch is welded in working position

Loc 6 Fault of actuator - Actuator faulty or blocked - Faulty connection - Wrong adjustment

Loc 7

Loss of flame Too many losses of flame during operation (limitation of repetitions) - Faulty or soiled fuel valves - Faulty or soiled flame detector - Poor adjustment of burner

Loc 8 --- Free

Loc 9 --- Free

Loc 10 Error not relatable (application), internal error Wiring error or internal error, output contacts,

other faults

Loc 12 Valve proving Fuel valve 1 leak

Loc 13 Valve proving Fuel valve 2 leak

Loc 14 POC error Error valve closure control POC

Loc 20 Gas pressure switch min open Gas shortage

Loc 22 Safety loop open - Gas pressure switch-max open - Safety limit thermostat cut out

Loc 60 Analog power source 4...20 mA, I <4 mA Wire breakage

Loc: 83 Faulty PWM fan

- PWM fan does not reach the target speed within the preset period of time, or - After reaching the target speed, the PWM fan leaves the tolerance band again (P650) for a time exceeding the tolerance time speed deviation (P660)

Loc 138 Restore process successful Restore process successful

Loc 139 No program module detected No program module identified

Loc 167 Manual locking Manual locking

Loc: 206 AZL2... incompatible Use the latest version

Page 220: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

220/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 26 Error code list with operation via internal LED 29.11.2011

Loc: 225 Faulty PWM fan

- Fan speed dropped below the minimum prepurge PWM (P675.00) after reaching the prepurge speed, or - After reaching the ignition load speed, the maximum ignition load PWM (P675.01) was exceeded

Loc: 226 Faulty PWM fan

Parameterization error: - Speed low-fire > speed high-fire, or - Low-fire = 0 rpm, or - Maximum speed = 0 rpm

Loc: 227 Faulty PWM fan One or several parameters violate the minimum/maximum limit

rSt Er1 Error in compatibility program module to basic unit during restore process

- Program sequence of program module does not match the basic unit

rSt Er2 Error in compatibility program module to basic unit during restore process

- Hardware of basic unit does not match the program module

rSt Er3 Error during the restore process - Program module faulty - Program module removed during restore process

Page 221: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

221/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 27 PWM settings 29.11.2011

27 PWM settings 27.1 Relevant parameters

Note: Initial parameter settings (also see chapter Initial PWM parameter settings)! Display depends on program.

Parameter Meaning

Ignition load speed (P403:[0] in ACS410 software): Corresponds to the ignition load speed in revolutions per minute (rpm). Prerequisite: P0 ≥ P0min (P516.00), P0 P0max (P516.01)

P0

Note: Step size of speed when making the setting with operating unit AZL2...: 10 rpm Step size of speed when making the setting with PC software ACS410: 1 rpm

Low-fire speed (P403:[1] in ACS410 software): Corresponds to the low-fire speed in revolutions per minute (rpm). Prerequisite: P1 ≥ P1min (P517.00), P1 ≤ P1max (P517.01)

P1

Note: Step size of speed when making the setting with operating unit AZL2...: 10 rpm Step size of speed when making the setting with PC software ACS410: 1 rpm

High-fire speed (P403:[3] in ACS410 software): Corresponds to the high-fire speed in revolutions per minute (rpm). Prerequisite: P2 ≥ P2min (P518.00), P2 ≤ P2max (P518.01)

P2

Note: Step size of speed when making the setting with operating unit AZL2...: 10 rpm Step size of speed when making the setting with PC software ACS410: 1 rpm

Standby speed: Corresponds to the standby speed in revolutions per minute (rpm), delivered as a PWM value in standby (OFF) or lockout position 1! This means that a connected PWM fan ensures purging at this speed in standby (OFF) or, when using a mains-powered fan, in lockout position 1 as well. In that case, compliance with the connection diagram of the PWM fan must be ensured! When using mains-powered fans, following must be observed: In terms of mains supply, the fan is no longer connected to the LME7... and, in the event of

fault/lockout, will not be disconnected from mains supply The PWM interface integrated in the fan must ensure safe electrical separation from mains (e.g.

via optocoupler) No PWM signal is delivered in lockout position 0 (LOC10). The PWM fan does not provide

purging in this lockout position

503.00

Note: Step size of speed when making the setting with operating unit AZL2...: 10 rpm Step size of speed when making the setting with PC software ACS410: 1 rpm

Purge speed: Corresponds to the speed in revolutions per minute (rpm) used by the fan for pre- and/or postpurging and/or valve proving.

503.01

Note: Step size of speed when making the setting with operating unit AZL2...: 10 rpm Step size of speed when making the setting with PC software ACS410: 1 rpm

Minimum limit speed ignition load P0: Corresponds to the minimum speed for ignition load P0 in revolutions per minute (rpm) at which the burner can still be securely ignited. Prerequisite: P516.00 P0

516.00

Note: Step size of speed when making the setting with operating unit AZL2...: 10 rpm Step size of speed when making the setting with PC software ACS410: 1 rpm

Page 222: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

222/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 27 PWM settings 29.11.2011

Parameter Meaning

Maximum limit speed ignition load P0: Corresponds to the maximum speed for ignition load P0 in revolutions per minute (rpm) at which the burner may still be securely ignited. Prerequisite: P516.01 ≥ P0

516.01

Note: Step size of speed when making the setting with operating unit AZL2...: 10 rpm Step size of speed when making the setting with PC software ACS410: 1 rpm

Minimum limit speed low-fire P1: Corresponds to the minimum speed for low-fire P1 in revolutions per minute (rpm) at which the burner still operates safely in the low-fire range. Prerequisite: P517.00 ≤ P1 fan speed

517.00

Note: Step size of speed when making the setting with operating unit AZL2...: 10 rpm Step size of speed when making the setting with PC software ACS410: 1 rpm

Maximum limit speed low-fire P1: Corresponds to the maximum speed for low-fire P1 in revolutions per minute (rpm) at which the burner still operates safely in the low-fire range. Prerequisite: P517.01 ≥ P1

517.01

Note: Step size of speed when making the setting with operating unit AZL2...: 10 rpm Step size of speed when making the setting with PC software ACS410: 1 rpm

Minimum limit speed high-fire P2: Corresponds to the minimum speed for high-fire P2 in revolutions per minute (rpm) for the burner operating in the high-fire range. Prerequisite: P518.00 ≤ P2

518.00

Note: Step size of speed when making the setting with operating unit AZL2...: 10 rpm Step size of speed when making the setting with PC software ACS410: 1 rpm

Maximum limit speed high-fire P2: Corresponds to the maximum speed for high-fire P2 in revolutions per minute (rpm) at which the burner may operate. Prerequisite: P518.01 ≥ P2

518.01

Note: Step size of speed when making the setting with operating unit AZL2...: 10 rpm Step size of speed when making the setting with PC software ACS410: 1 rpm

519 Maximum fan speed Corresponds to the maximum fan speed (see supplier’s Data Sheet).

644 Number of pulses per revolution Corresponds to the number of (Hall signal) pulses per revolution the fan feeds back to the control (see supplier’s Data Sheet).

658.00 Startup PWM PWM value the PWM fan needs as a minimum to start from standstill (see supplier’s Data Sheet).

658.01 Minimum operating limit of PWM Represents the minimum limit value of PWM, which fan speed control does not cross.

658.02 Maximum operating limit of PWM Represents the maximum limit value of PWM, which fan speed control does not cross.

Page 223: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

223/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 27 PWM settings 29.11.2011

27.2 PWM control parameters

Parameter Meaning

522 Ramp-up Control parameter ”Ramp time” is the preset time in seconds (s) within which the PWM signal reaches the setpoint with a positive setpoint step (0 rpm to high-fire rpm). Factory setting: Approx. 15 seconds

523 Ramp-down Control parameter ”Ramp time” is the preset time in seconds (s) within which the PWM signal reaches the setpoint with a negative setpoint step (high-fire rpm to 0 rpm). Factory setting: Approx. 15 seconds

646 Settling time for assessment of speed The current speed must lie within tolerance band 1 (P650.00) of the required speed for this period of time before the target speed is considered reached (speed release).

650.00 Tolerance band 1 (speed shutdown) Factory setting: 1% If the current speed leaves value range Required speed ± set tolerance band 1 for a period of time exceeding the time set with parameter P646, lockout Loc 83 will be initiated.

650.01 Tolerance band 2 (quick speed shutdown) Factory setting: 3% If the current speed leaves value range Required speed ± set tolerance band 2, lockout Loc 83 will immediately be initiated.

660 Tolerance time speed deviation A speed deviation outside tolerance band 1 (P650.00) will be tolerated for the period of time set. If it lasts longer, lockout Loc 83 will be initiated.

674 Neutral band Minimum speed change in revolutions per minute. Factory setting: 40 rpm Protection from speed oscillations. Only control offsets with speed changes above the setting value will be corrected (dead band).

679.00 Time constant PT1 controller for speed control in the upper speed range high-fire to low-fire.

679.01 Time constant PT1 controller for speed control in the medium speed range high-fire to low-fire.

679.02 Time constant PT1 controller for speed control in the lower speed range high-fire to low-fire.

679.03 Time constant PT1 controller for speed control in the entire speed range low-fire to high-fire.

680.00 Threshold between upper and medium speed range for control parameters P679.02 and P679.01.

680.01 Threshold between medium and lower speed range for control parameters P679.01 and P679.00.

Page 224: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

224/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 27 PWM settings 29.11.2011

27.3 PWM safety parameters

Note: Also see chapter Initial PWM parameter settings!

Parameter Meaning

559 PWM mode control Determines the behavior of PWM control, delivering a PWM signal proportional to the preset output (analog/3-position step input). Control: Controls the PWM speed proportional to the output preset via the analog or 3-position step input. Safety mode: Control for defining the PWM safety parameters.

675.00 Minimum PWM with prepurging, SEC Minimum PWM signal in percent for prepurging

675.01 Maximum PWM with ignition load, SEC Maximum PWM signal in percent for ignition load

920 (Current) PWM signal fan PWM signal in percent. Readable on the service level with AZL2... (press Info button for >3 seconds).

Page 225: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

225/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 27 PWM settings 29.11.2011

27.4 Initial PWM parameter settings 27.4.1 Initial settings of PWM basic parameters

Note: The initial settings of the PWM basic parameter are made exclusively on the OEM level.

Prerequisites

Operating unit AZL2... for setting the parameters is connected Unit is wired up in accordance with the proposed application Mains voltage is available Safety loop is closed There is no heat request, unit is in standby (OFF) Fan parameters, such as maximum speed and Hall signal (number of pulses per

revolution) are known With unprogrammed program module (initial settings), AZL2... displays OFF UPr With unprogrammed program module (initial settings), the onboard operating panel

of the LME7... displays UPr

Operating steps Select programming mode for OEM

Press A and F simultaneously for <5 seconds. Display shows CodE

Enter the OEM’s password via , and /reset. Also see chapter Entering the password

Display shows PArA and then 400: SEt. Confirm by pressing /reset Unit jumps to setting parameter P0 (ignition load position) 516.00 (516 blinking).

Keep /reset depressed for >1 second. Subindex 00 is blinking

Keep /reset depressed for >1 second. Display changes to -. Also see chapter Setting parameters with index, with or without direct display

By pressing or the speed can be changed in step sizes of 10 rpm. Set the required minimum limit speed for the ignition load position at which the burner can still be safely ignited

Press /reset to transfer the setting value to the onboard memory

By pressing

ESC

(press and simultaneously) you leave the entry level and return to the selection level for the subindex

Subindex 00 blinks. Press to select the next subindex. Subindex 01 blinks

Press /reset for >1 second. Display changes to -

By pressing or the speed can be changed in step sizes of 10 rpm. Set the required maximum limit speed for the ignition load position at which the burner may still be safely ignited

Press /reset to transfer the setting value to the onboard memory

By pressing

ESC

twice (press and simultaneously) you leave the entry level and return to the selection level for the parameter number

Page 226: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

226/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 27 PWM settings 29.11.2011

Parameter number 516 blinks. Press to select the next parameter. Parameter 517 blinks

Now, for the following parameters, proceed as described above: - P1 low-fire position 517 - P2 high-fire position 518

For parameter number 519, press /reset for >1 second

By pressing or the speed can be changed in step sizes of 10 rpm. Also see chapter Setting parameters without index, without direct display. Set the required maximum speed for the connected fan (also see the supplier’s Data Sheet)

Press /reset to transfer the setting value to onboard memory

By pressing

ESC

(press and simultaneously) you leave the entry level and return to the selection level for the parameters

Parameter number 519 blinks. Press to select the next parameter. Parameter 644 blinks

Press /reset for >1 second

By pressing or the number of pulses per revolution (Hall signals) the unit feeds back to the control can be set (see supplier’s Data Sheet)

Press /reset to transfer the setting value to the onboard memory

By pressing

ESC

(press and simultaneously) you leave the entry level and return to the selection level for the parameters

Parameter number 644 blinks. Press to select the next parameter. Parameter P0 blinks

By pressing A (display changes to 0A and speed appears blinking) and pressing

or the speed can be changed within the predefined limits (P0max, P0min) in step sizes of 10 rpm

Press /reset to transfer the setting value to the onboard memory and the next parameter P1

By pressing A (display changes to 1A and speed appears blinking) and pressing

or the speed can be changed within the predefined limits (P1max, P1min) in step sizes of 10 rpm

Press /reset to transfer the setting value to the onboard memory and the next parameter P2

By pressing A (display changes to 2A and speed appears blinking) and pressing

or the speed can be changed within the predefined limits (P2max, P2min) in step sizes of 10 rpm

Press /reset to transfer the setting value to the onboard memory and to complete the initial settings

Display shows -END-

Page 227: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

227/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 27 PWM settings 29.11.2011

By pressing

ESC

(press and simultaneously) you leave the entry level and return to the selection level for the parameters

Display changes from PArA to 400: SEt

Press to select the next parameter group (P500...P600). Display: 500: PArA

Press /reset to go to the respective group

Press or to select parameter 503.00 (503 blinking)

Press /reset for >1 second. Subindex 00 blinks

Press or to select subindex 01

Press /reset for >1 second. Display shows the prepurge speed. Also see chapter Setting parameters with index, with or without direct display

By pressing or the speed can be changed in step sizes of 10 rpm. Set the required minimum prepurge speed

Press /reset to transfer the setting value to the onboard memory

By pressing

ESC

3 times (press and simultaneously) you leave the entry level and return to the selection levels for the subindex. Parameter for returning to the parameter group (display shows 500: PArA)

Press to select the next parameter group (P600...P700). Display shows 600: PArA

Press /reset to go to the respective group

Press or to select parameter 675.00 (675 blinking)

Press /reset for >1 second. Subindex 00 blinks

Press /reset

Press or to set the value to 40%

Press /reset to transfer the setting value to the onboard memory

By pressing

ESC

3 times (press and simultaneously) you leave the parameter level and return to the subindex

Press or to select subindex 01

Press /reset

Press or to set the value to 55%

Press /reset to transfer the setting value to the onboard memory

By pressing

ESC

twice (press and simultaneously) you leave the parameter setting level and return to the initial mode

Warning! In the case of burner components (PWM fan) with voltage-related behavior, it is recommended to read out the value (current PWM signal, parameter 920) for the prepurge phase (P30) with the minimum permissible prepurge speed close to the undervoltage limit, and for the ignition phases (P38, 40 and 44) with the maximum

Page 228: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

228/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 27 PWM settings 29.11.2011

permissible ignition speed close to the overvoltage limit. If this is not observed, there is a risk of loss of safety functions.

27.4.2 Reading the value of parameter 920 in the prepurge

phase (P30) and ignition load phase (P38, P40 and P44)

Procedure

Set the ignition load speed (P0) for the burner to the maximum permissible value,

and the prepurge speed (503.01) to the minimum value

Let the AZL2... display service mode. Press /reset for >3 seconds. The display first shows InFo, then SEr

Release /reset so that parameter number 701.00 starts blinking

Press or to select parameter 920 (blinking) Start the burner Read the value of parameter 920 in the prepurge phase (P30) and ignition phase

(P38, 40 and 44). Write down the values. They will be required as a basis for setting safety parameter 675.00

By pressing

ESC

(press and simultaneously) you leave the parameter setting level and return to the initial mode

Note: If the onboard operating panel of the LME7... basic unit changes from phase display (e.g. P30) to SEC at 1-second intervals, or if the LME7... goes to lockout (Loc: 225), the difference between the actually required PWM value (parameter 936) and safety parameter 675.00 or 675.01 is too small. Decrease value 675.00 (parameter 920 - 1%) or increase value 675.01 (parameter 920 +1%). Reduce the value until SEC disappears from the display.

Page 229: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

229/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 27 PWM settings 29.11.2011

27.4.3 Final settings of PWM safety parameters

Note: PWM control by the LME7... makes use of the Hall signal for feedback. This Hall signal is used to calculate the manipulated variable of the PWM control process. To prevent the calculation of wrong manipulated variables in the event of incorrect Hall signals, the working range of PWM control must be restricted via parameter 675.00/675.01. For that purpose, the burner is operated in special test mode (parameter 559).

Warning! In the case of burner components (PWM fan) with voltage-related behavior, it is recommended to read out the value (current PWM signal, parameter 920) for the prepurge phase (P30) with the minimum permissible prepurge speed close to the undervoltage limit, and for the ignition phases (P38, 40 and 44) with the maximum permissible ignition speed close to the overvoltage limit. If this is not observed, there is a risk of loss of safety functions.

Procedure

Select test mode (parameter 559) and check the prepurge speed under worst-case conditions close to the undervoltage limit, or check the ignition load speeds under worst-case conditions close to the overvoltage limit:

Reference: In test mode (parameter 559, setting value = 2), the normalized PWM signal (parameter 675.00) for the prepurge phase or the PWM signal (parameter 675.01) for the ignition phase is output as a fixed value. Start the burner and check the speed, the volumetric air flow or air pressures under these worst-case conditions by taking appropriate measures while ensuring compliance with the relevant standards (e.g. EN 676).

Set safety parameter 675.00 to the value previously determined by parameter 920

in the prepurge phase (P30) -1% and safety parameter 675.01 to the value of parameter 920 in the ignition phase (P38, 40 and 48) +1%

Follow these steps

Select programming mode for the OEM

Press A and F simultaneously for <5 seconds. Display shows CodE

Enter the OEM’s password via , and /reset. Also see chapter Entering the password

Display changes from PArA to 400: SEt

Press to select the next parameter group (P500...P600). Display shows 500: PArA

Press /reset to go to the respective group

Press or to select parameter 559

Press /reset

Press or to set the value (2 test modes)

Press /reset to transfer the setting value to the onboard memory

By pressing

ESC

twice (press and simultaneously) you leave the parameter setting level and return to the parameter group

Press to select the parameter group (P600...P700). Display shows 600: PArA

Page 230: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

230/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 27 PWM settings 29.11.2011

Press /reset to go to the respective group

Press or to select parameter 675.00 (675 blinking)

Press /reset for >1 second. Subindex 00 blinks

Press /reset

Press or to set the previously determined value -1% of parameter 920 (prepurge phase (P30))

Press /reset to transfer the setting value to the onboard memory

By pressing

ESC

(press and simultaneously) you return to the subindex. Display shows 00 blinking

Press or to select subindex 01

Press /reset

Press or to set the previously determined value -1% of parameter 920 (ignition phase (P38, 40 and 44))

Press /reset to transfer the setting value to the onboard memory

By pressing

ESC

4 times (press and simultaneously) you leave the parameter setting level and return to the initial mode

Note: Test mode is indicated by the unit’s 7-segment display changing from SEC to the relevant program phase at 1-second intervals.

Checking prepurging

To check the prepurge speed, set the required worst-case conditions close to the

undervoltage limit Start the burner and check the speed, the volumetric air flow or air pressure by

taking appropriate measures while ensuring compliance with the relevant standards (e.g. EN 676) in the prepurge phase (P30)

If the worst-case requirements are not satisfied, change safety parameter 675.00 accordingly

Checking the ignition load

To check the ignition load speed, set the required worst-case conditions close to

the overvoltage limit Start the burner and check the speed, the volumetric air flow or air pressure by

taking appropriate measures while ensuring compliance with the relevant standards (e.g. EN 676) in the ignition phase (P38, P40 or P44)

If the worst-case requirements are not satisfied, change safety parameter 675.01 accordingly

On successful completion of the test, reset parameter 559 to control as described above (setting value = 1).

Note: To store the settings in the PME... program module, a manual backup is required. Also see chapter Manual backup.

Page 231: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

231/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 27 PWM settings 29.11.2011

27.4.4 Setting safety parameters 675.00/675.01 and checking

the safety settings under worst-case conditions

Procedure

Select test mode (parameter 559) and check the prepurge speed under worst-case conditions close to the undervoltage limit, or check the ignition load speeds under worst-case conditions close to the overvoltage limit:

Note: In test mode (parameter 559, setting value = 2), the normalized PWM signal (parameter 675.00) for the prepurge phase or the PWM signal (parameter 675.01) for the ignition phase is output as a fixed value. Start the burner and check the speed, the volumetric air flow or air pressure under these worst-case conditions by taking appropriate measures while ensuring compliance with the relevant standards (e.g. EN 676).

Follow these steps

Select programming mode for the OEM

Press A and F simultaneously for <5 seconds. Display shows CodE

Enter the OEM’s password via , and /reset. Also see chapter Entering the password

Display changes from PArA to 400: SEt

Press to select the next parameter group (P500...P600). Display shows 500: PArA

Press /reset to go to the respective group

Press or to select parameter 559

Press /reset

Press or to set the value (2 test modes)

Press /reset to transfer the setting value to the onboard memory

By pressing

ESC

twice (press and simultaneously) you leave the parameter setting level and return to the parameter group

Checking prepurging

To check the prepurge speed, set the required worst-case conditions close to the

undervoltage limit Start the burner and check the speed, the volumetric air flow or air pressure by

taking appropriate measures while ensuring compliance with the relevant standards (e.g. EN 676) in the prepurge phase (P30)

If the worst-case requirements are not satisfied, change safety parameter 675.00 accordingly

Page 232: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

232/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 27 PWM settings 29.11.2011

Checking the ignition load

To check the ignition load speed, set the required worst-case conditions close to

the overvoltage limit Start the burner and check the speed, the volumetric air flow or air pressure by

taking appropriate measures while ensuring compliance with the relevant standards (e.g. EN 676) in the ignition phase (P38, P40 or P44)

If the worst-case requirements are not satisfied, change safety parameter 675.01 accordingly

On successful completion of the test, reset parameter 559 to control as described above (setting value = 1).

Note: To store the settings in the PME... program module, a manual backup is required. Also see chapter Manual backup.

27.4.5 Matching the working points “Speeds for low-fire (P1),

ignition load (P0) and high-fire (P2) for the heating engineer to the application

Prerequisites

Initial settings of the basic PWM parameters on the OEM level are made Unit is wired up in accordance with the proposed application Mains voltage is available Safety loop is closed There is no heat request, unit is in standby (OFF)

Page 233: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

233/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 27 PWM settings 29.11.2011

27.4.6 ... via the onboard operating panel of the LME7... basic unit

Keep A

and

+

or simultaneously depressed for >5 seconds. Display shows OFF blinking

Note: If there is no operating action for >30 seconds, the LME7... changes automatically to standard mode. This means that adaptation of the working points must be started again. Heat request (temperature controller) ON Basic unit is started and runs through the startup phase. Then, the unit runs

through the respective program phases in accordance with the program sequence; the numbers appear blinking

The unit proceeds to the end of the prepurge phase (P30), goes to the start load position and then displays P0 (ignition load sped). In the process, the display shows alternately P0 and a 3-digit number

Note: The 3-digit number shows the setting value for parameter P0/P1 or P2 as the speed and must be multiplied by 10.

By pressing

A

and

+

or the speed can be changed in step sizes of 10 rpm within the limits predefined by the OEM (P0max, P0min)

Note! The setting value of P0 must be greater than the setting value of P1. The basic unit checks the setting values. If setting rules are violated, the unit goes to lockout and displays error message Loc: 225.

Press

nfo

to transfer the setting value to the onboard memory The startup phase proceeds. The burner is ignited. The program proceeds to low-

fire position P1. In the process, the display shows alternately P1 and the speed

By pressing

A

and

+

or the speed can be changed in step sizes of 10 rpm within the limits predefined by the OEM (P1max, P1min)

Press

nfo

to transfer the setting value to the onboard memory The burner proceeds to high-fire position P2. In the process, the display shows

alternately P2 and the speed

By pressing

A

and

+

or the speed can be changed in step sizes of 10 rpm within the limits predefined by the OEM (P2max, P2min)

Press /reset to transfer the setting value to the onboard memory

By pressing ESC (press

+

and simultaneously) the setting process is ended and the burner changes to the operating position

In the operating position, the output predefined by the external load controller applies

Note: To store the settings in the PME... program module, a manual backup is required. Also see chapter Manual backup.

Page 234: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

234/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 27 PWM settings 29.11.2011

27.4.7 ... via the AZL2... operating unit Start the programming mode for the heating engineer

Keep A and F depressed for <5 seconds. Display shows Code

Enter the heating engineer’s password via , and /reset. Also see chapter Entering the password

Display shows PArA and then 400: SEt. Confirm by pressing /reset

Display changes to run. Confirm by pressing /reset to start the setting mode for low-fire (P1), ignition load (P0) and high-fire (P2)

Heat request (temperature controller) ON Basic unit is started and runs through the startup phase. Then, the unit runs

through the respective program phases in accordance with the program sequence and the numbers appear blinking

The unit proceeds to the end of the prepurge phase (P30), goes to the start load position and then displays P0 (ignition load sped). In the process, the display shows alternately P0 (blinking) and the speed

By pressing A (display changes to 0A and the speed appears blinking) and

pressing or the speed can be changed in step sizes of 10 rpm within the limits predefined by the OEM (P0max, P0min)

Note! The setting value of P0 must be greater than the setting value of P1. The basic unit checks the setting values. If setting rules are violated, the unit goes to lockout and displays error message Loc: 225.

Press /reset to transfer the setting value to the onboard memory The startup phase proceeds. The burner is ignited. The program proceeds to low-

fire position P1. In the process, the display shows alternately P1 (blinking) and the speed

By pressing A (display changes to 1A and the speed appears blinking) and

pressing or the speed can be changed in step sizes of 10 rpm within the limits predefined by the OEM (P1max, P1min)

Press /reset to transfer the setting value to the onboard memory Display changes briefly to oP: P1. The fan speed changes to the value for high-fire

P2 and the display changes to P2 (blinking) to show the speed

By pressing A (display changes to 2A and the speed appears blinking) and

pressing or the speed can be changed in step sizes of 10 rpm within the limits predefined by the OEM (P2max, P2min)

Press /reset to transfer the setting value to the onboard memory Then, the display changes briefly to oP: P1. The fan speed changes to the value

for low-fire P1 and the display changes to P1 (blinking) to show the speed From here, the low-fire speeds P1 or high-fire speeds P2 can be changed again as

described above, or the setting process can be ended and the burner be brought

into its operating position by pressing

ESC

several times (press and simultaneously)

Page 235: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

235/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 27 PWM settings 29.11.2011

In the operating position, the output predefined by the external load controller applies

Note: To store the settings in the PME... program module, a manual backup is required. Also see chapter Manual backup.

Page 236: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

236/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 27 PWM settings 29.11.2011

27.5 Overview of PWM fan parameters (value range refers to PME71.901)

Parameter- Designation Value range Step size *) Conditions

number Min. Max.

403.00 Fan speed: Ignition load speed (P0) 800 9000 10 rpm Factory setting 3000 rpm

403.01 Fan speed: Low-fire speed (P1) 800 9000 10 rpm Factory setting 1200 rpm

403.02 Fan speed: High-fire speed (P2) 800 9000 10 rpm Factory setting 5700 rpm

503.00 No-flame speeds PWM fan: Standby speed

0 9000 10 rpm 0 up to max. speed

503.01 No-flame speeds PWM fan: Purge speed 800 9000 10 rpm < max. speed

516.00 Limit speed ignition load P0: Min. limit 800 9000 10 rpm P1min < P0min < P1max

516.01 Limit speed ignition load P0: Max. limit 800 9000 10 rpm P0max < P1max

517.00 Limit speed low-fire P1: Min. limit 800 9000 10 rpm ---

517.01 Limit speed low-fire P1: Max. limit 800 9000 10 rpm P1max < P2min

518.00 Limit speed high-fire P2: Min. limit 800 9000 10 rpm P2min > P1max

518.01 Limit speed high-fire P2: Max. limit 800 9000 10 rpm P2max > P2 min

519 Max. speed fan 3000 9000 10 rpm Factory setting 5830 rpm

522 Ramp-up low-fire high-fire 2.058 74.970 0.294 s Factory setting approx. 15 s

523 Ramp-down high-fire low-fire 2.058 74.970 0.294 s Factory setting approx. 15 s

559

PWM mode 0 = open loop control 1 = PID control 2 = safety mode (PWM limits)

0 2 1 Factory setting 1 (control)

560

Mode: Pneumatic ratio control 0 = OFF 1 = PWM fan 2 = air damper actuator

0 2 1 Factory setting 1 (PWM fan)

644 Number of pulses per revolution 2 5 1 Factory setting 3 (Hall pulses/rev)

646 Settling time for speed assessment 1.029 2.058 0.147 s Factory setting 2.1 seconds

650.00 Speed tolerance band: Speed shutdown 1 5 1% Factory setting 1%

650.01 Speed tolerance band quick speed shutdown

1 10 1% Factory setting 3%

658.00 PWM values fan: Start PWM 1 100 1% Factory setting 25%

658.01 PWM values fan: Min. PWM 0 20 1% Factory setting 0%

658.02 PWM values fan: Max. PWM 80 100 1% Factory setting 100%

659.00 Ramp time of fan: Min. low-fire to high-fire 0 74.970 0.294 s Factory setting 2.058 seconds

659.01 Ramp time of fan: Max. low-fire to high-fire

0 74.970 0.294 s Factory setting 74.970 seconds

659.02 Ramp time of fan: Min. high-fire to low-fire 0 74.970 0.294 s Factory setting 2.058 seconds

659.03 Ramp time of fan: Max. high-fire to low-fire

0 74.970 0.294 s Factory setting 74.970 seconds

660 Tolerance time speed deviation 0 37.485 0.147 s Factory setting 4.998 seconds

674 Neutral band (permitted control offset) 0 255 1 rpm Factory setting 40 rpm

675.00 PWM: Min. PWM with prepurging, SEC 0 100 1% Factory setting 86%

675.01 PWM: Max. PWM with ignition load, SEC 0 100 1% Factory setting 34%

676 Gain factor speed control 0 255 1 Factory setting 112

Page 237: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

237/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 27 PWM settings 29.11.2011

Parameter- Designation Value range Step size *) Conditions

number Min. Max.

677 Integral action time speed control 0 37.485 0.147 s Factory setting 0.441 s

678 Derivative action time speed control 0 37.485 0.147 s Factory setting 0 seconds

679.00 Time constant PT1 speed control: Lower speed range high-fire to low-fire

0 37.485 0.147 s Factory setting 6.027 seconds

679.01 Time constant PT1 speed control: Medium speed range high-fire to low-fire

0 37.485 0.147 s Factory setting 6.027 seconds

679.02 Time constant PT1 speed control: Upper speed range high-fire to low-fire

0 37.485 0.147 s Factory setting 6.027 seconds

679.03 Time constant PT1 speed control: Entire speed range low-fire to high-fire

0 37.485 0.147 s Factory setting 6.027 seconds

680.00 Speed range for PT1 time constant: Threshold upper speed range

800 9000 10 rpm Factory setting 4000 rpm

680.01 Speed range for PT1 time constant: Threshold lower speed range

800 9000 10 rpm Factory setting 2000 rpm

920 Current PWM signal fan 0 100 1% Service parameter *) Step size of speeds when making the settings via PC software ACS410: 1 rpm

Page 238: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

238/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 27 PWM settings 29.11.2011

Index A AZL2

Description of the unit/display and buttons.............................. 169 Info level................................... 176 Display of info level............... 177 Display of info values ........... 177 End of info level..................... 180 Identification date.................. 177 Identification number ............ 177 Identification of burner ......... 178 Number of startups resettable

............................................. 179 Total number of startups ...... 180

Meaning of symbols on the display ...................................... 170 Menu-driven operation............ 175 Assignment of levels ............ 175

Operating variants of the parameters Parameters with index, with or

without direct display ........ 196 Parameters without index, with

direct display...................... 192 Parameters without index, with

no direct display ................ 194 Operation ................................. 171 Display during

startup/shutdown............... 171 Display in standby mode ...... 171 Display of operating position173 Fault status messages, display

of errors and info ............... 174 Normal display....................... 171

Operation via AZL2 ................. 169 Parameter level Backup ................................... 188 Changing the heating engineer's

password ............................ 186 Changing the OEM's password

............................................. 187 Entering the password.......... 184 Restore ................................... 190

Service level Display of service values...... 182 Display of the service level .. 181 End of service level ............... 182 Error history........................... 182 Intensity of flame ................... 182 Mains voltage......................... 182

Special functions..................... 170 Manual lockout ...................... 170

AZL2

Safety notes relating to operation...................................................168

AZL2 Service level .............................181

AZL2 Parameter level ........................183

AZL2 Operating variants of the parameters ...............................192

AZL2 Error code list ..........................199

B Basic unit .........................................45

Air pressure switch X3-02.........47 Description of inputs and outputs ................Digital input ................................46 Flame signal input and flame detector X10-06 ..........................45 Input for external controller X5-03, terminal 1..............................46 Safety Loop X3-04, terminal 1 and 2 ...........................................46

D Dimensions......................................37

LME7 ...........................................37 F Function...........................................38

Control sequence in the event of fault .............................................39 Controlled intermittent operation.....................................................38 Limitation of repetitions............40 Parameter 240.01 .......................40 Parameter 240/240.00 ................40 Preconditions for burner startup.....................................................38 Resetting the burner control ....39 Undervoltage..............................38

I Inputs/outputs .................................44 L LED

Description of display and buttons......................................201 Error code list ..........................219 Fault status messages, display of errors ........................................206 Display of errors with lockout

.............................................206 Display of flame current ION or

QRA .....................................207 Display of preset output........209 Reset .......................................207

Page 239: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

239/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 27 PWM settings 29.11.2011

First startup with a new program module or in case of replacement of program module.................. 213 Manual adjustment.................. 210 Position of actuator or speed of

PWM fan in modulating operation with analog signal............................................. 210

Manual backup ........................ 215 Error during backup process216

Manual restore......................... 217 Errors during the restore

process ............................... 218 Reset....................................... 218

Normal display......................... 202 Display during

startup/shutdown............... 202 Display in standby mode ...... 202 Display of operating position205 Display of program phases .. 202 List of phase display ............. 203

Special functions Manual lockout ...................... 205

Special functions: ................... 205 LED

Operation via internal LED ..... 201 LME7

Features ..................................... 22 Indication and diagnostics ........... 22

LME7 System makeup/function description ................................. 21

M Multistage or modulating mode .. 163

Actuators.................................. 164 Connection diagram for feedback potentiometer ASZ12.33 ......... 163 Connection diagram for load controller.................................. 164 Funktion ................................... 164 Load controller inputs ............ 165 Selection source preset output

analog/3-position step input............................................. 165

Setting the maximum running time of the actuator ........... 165

X2-09 ....................................... 165 X5-03 ....................................... 165 X65 .......................................... 165

Modulating mode via analog input signal X65....................... 166 Maximum possible resolution

............................................. 166 Standardization of modulating

range ................................... 166

Multistage or modulating mode Relevant parameters..............163

Multistage/modulating mode via 3-position step input X5-03.....166 Maximum possible resolution

.............................................166 Setting the minimum power control step in modulating mode via analog input signal X65.....167

O Operation, indication, diagnostics 41

Diagnostics of cause of fault....42 Indication of operating state.....41 Operation....................................41

P PME71.401 .......................................48

Connection diagrams for fuel train applications .......................50 Gas direct ignition G, 1-stage...50 Gas direct ignition G, 2-stage...50 LME71.000 Inputs and outputs/internal

connection diagram .............52 Parameter list .............................53 Program sequence PME71.401.48 Time table and settings for program sequence.....................51

PME71.402 .......................................55 Connection diagrams for fuel train applications .......................57 Gas direct ignition G, 1-stage...57 LME71.000 Inputs and outputs/internal

connection diagram .............59 Parameter list .............................60 Program sequence ....................55 Time table and settings for program sequence.....................58

PME71.402 Gas pilot ignition 1 G1/1, 1-stage.....................................................57

PME71.901 .......................................63 Connection diagrams for fuel train applications .......................65 Gas direct ignition G, 1-stage...65 Gas direct ignition G, 1-stage and valve proving..............................65 Gas valve proving......................66 LME71.000 Inputs and outputs/internal

connection diagram .............69 Parameter list .............................70 Program sequence PME71.901.63 Time table and settings for program sequence PME71.901.68

PME72.521

Page 240: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

240/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 27 PWM settings 29.11.2011

Connection diagram for LME72.000 with actuator SQM478 Connection diagram for LME72.000 without actuator SQM4 .......................................... 79 Connection diagrams for fuel train applications....................... 77 Gas direct ignition 1 G1/1, 2-stage ........................................... 77 Gas direct ignition G, 1-stage .. 77 LME72.000 Inputs and outputs/internal

connection diagram............. 81 Parameter list ............................ 82 Time table and settings for program sequence .................... 80

PME72.521....................................... 75 Program sequence .................... 75

PME72.541....................................... 84 Connection diagram for LME72.000 with actuator SQM487 Connection diagram for LME72.000 without actuator SQM4 .......................................... 88 Connection diagrams for fuel train applications....................... 86 Gas direct ignition G, 1-stage .. 86 Gas pilot ignition 1 Gp1/1, 1-stage ........................................... 86 LME72.000 Inputs and outputs/internal

connection diagram............. 90 Parameter list ............................ 91 Program sequence .................... 84 Time table and settings for program sequence .................... 89

PME73.810....................................... 93 Connection diagram for LME73.000 with actuator SQM499 Connection diagrams for fuel train applications....................... 95 Gas direct ignition G, 1-stage .. 95 Gas direct ignition G, 1-stage, with valve proving ..................... 96 Gas direct ignition G, 2-stage .. 95 Gas direct ignition G, 2-stage, with valve proving ..................... 96 Gas valve proving ..................... 97 LME73.000 Inputs and outputs/internal

connection diagram........... 101 Parameter list .......................... 102 Program sequence .................... 93 Time table and settings for program.................................... 100

PME73.820 .....................................105 Connection diagram for LME73.000 with actuator SQM4...................................................111 Connection diagram for LME73.000 without actuator SQM4.........................................112 Connection diagrams for fuel train applications .....................107 Gas direct ignition 1 G, 1-stage, with valve proving ...................108 Gas direct ignition 1 G, 2-stage...................................................107 Gas direct ignition G, 1-stage.107 Gas direct ignition G, 2-stage, with valve proving ...................108 Gas valve proving....................109 LME73.000 Inputs and outputs/internal

connection diagram ...........114 Parameter list ...........................115 Program sequence ..................105 Time tables and settings for program sequence...................113

PME73.830 .....................................118 Connection diagram for LME73.000 with actuator SQM4...................................................124 Connection diagrams for fuel train applications .....................120 Gas direct ignition 1 Gp1/2, 1-stage, with valve proving ........121 Gas direct ignition G, 1-stage.120 Gas pilot ignition 1 Gp1/1, 1-stage .........................................120 Gas pilot ignition 1 Gp1/2, 1-stage, with valve proving ........121 Gas valve proving....................122 LME73.000 Inputs and outputs/internal

connection diagram ...........126 Parameter list ...........................127 Program sequence ..................118 Time table and settings for program sequence...................125

PME73.831 .....................................130 Connection diagram for LME73.000 with actuator SQM4...........................................139, 140 Connection diagrams for fuel applications..............................135 Gas direct ignition 1 G, 1-stage, with valve proving ...................136 Gas direct ignition G, 1-stage, without valve proving..............135

Page 241: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

241/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 27 PWM settings 29.11.2011

Gas pilot ignition 1 Gp1, 1-stage, with valve proving alternate burning ignition burner........... 136 Gas pilot ignition 2 Gp2, 1-stage, without valve proving simultaneously ignition burner.................................................. 135 LME73.000 Inputs and outputs/internal

connection diagram........... 143 Parameter list .......................... 144 Program sequence .................. 130 Time table and settings for program sequence .................. 141 Valve proving of gas valves ... 137

PME73.840..................................... 148 Connection diagram for LME73.000 with actuator SQM4.................................................. 154 Connection diagram for LME73.000 without actuator SQM4 ........................................ 155 Connection diagrams for fuel train applications..................... 150 Gas direct ignition 1 Gp1/2, 1-stage, with valve proving........ 151 Gas direct ignition G, 1-stage 150 Gas pilot ignition 1 Gp1/1, 1-stage ......................................... 150 Gas pilot ignition 1 Gp1/2, 1-stage, with valve proving........ 151 Gas valve proving ................... 152 LME73.000 Inputs and outputs/internal

connection diagram........... 157 Parameter list .......................... 158 Program sequence .................. 148 Time table and settings for program sequence .................. 156

PWM settings Initial PWM parameter settings.................................................. 225 Final settings of PWM safety

parameters ......................... 229 Initial settings of PWM basic

parameters ......................... 225 Matching the working points 232 Reading the value of parameter

920 in the prepurge phase and ignition load phase ............ 228

Setting safety parameters 675.00/675.01 and checking

the safety settings under worst-case conditions .......231

Overview of PWM fan parameters...................................................236 PWM control parameters ........223 PWM safety parameters ..........224 Relevant parameters ...............221 via the AZL2... operating unit .234 via the onboard operating panel of the LME7... basic unit..........233

PWM settings.................................221 S Safety notes

Commissioning notes ...............18 Correct use.................................20 Disposal notes ...........................19 Electrical connection of flame detectors.....................................17 Installation notes....................15, 16 Lifetime .......................................19 Mounting notes ..........................15 Qualified personnel ...................20 Standards and certificates........19 Typographical conventions ......20

Safety notes.....................................13 Warning notes............................13

T Technical data

Actuators ....................................32 AZL2 - BCI ..................................33 Basic unit LME7 .........................30 Cable lengths .............................32 Cross-sectional areas ...............32 Dummy plug for RJ11................33 Environmental conditions.........33 Flame detector QRA2/QRA4.U/QRA10 ...............36 Flame supervision .....................34 Ionization probe .........................34 Signal cable AGV50 ...................33 Terminal rating Inputs ...............30 Terminal rating Outputs ............31

Type summary Actuators ....................................27 Burner controls..........................23 Connector sets for LME7 ..........28 Dummy plugs for RJ11..............28 External display and operating units ............................................26 Flame detectors .........................26 Pressure switch .........................27 Program module ........................24 Service tools ..............................28 Test case and accessories .......29

Page 242: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

242/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 29.11.2011

28 List of figures

Figure 1: Mounting – mounting surface .........................................................................15

Figure 2: Example: Modulating gas burner....................................................................21

Figure 3: Ionization input at AC 120 V/AC 230 V ..........................................................34

Figure 4: Measuring circuit for ionization probe.............................................................35

Figure 5: Measuring circuit for QRA... ...........................................................................36

Figure 6: Dimensions of LME7... ...................................................................................37

Figure 7: Diagnostics of cause of fault...........................................................................42

Figure 8: Inputs/outputs.................................................................................................44

Figure 9: Flame signal input X10-06..............................................................................45

Figure 10: Safety Loop X3-04........................................................................................46

Figure 11: Inputs for external load controller ON/OFF X5-03........................................46

Figure 12: Air pressure switch X3-02 ............................................................................47

Figure 13: Program sequence PME71.401... for connection diagram fuel train (G)......48

Figure 14: Connection diagram fuel train gas direct ignition (G), 1-stage .....................50

Figure 15: Connection diagram fuel train gas direct ignition (G), 2-stage .....................50

Figure 16: LME71.000...: Inputs and outputs/internal connection diagram ...................52

Figure 17: Program sequence PME71.402... for connection diagram fuel trains (G)/Gp1/1) ..............................................................................................................55

Figure 18: Connection diagram fuel train gas direct ignition (G), 1-stage .....................57

Figure 19: Connection diagram fuel train gas pilot ignition 1 (Gp1/1), 1-stage .............57

Figure 20: LME71.000...: Inputs and outputs/internal connection diagram ...................59

Figure 21: Program sequence PME71.901... for connection diagram fuel train (G)......63

Figure 22: Connection diagram fuel train gas direct ignition (G), 1-stage .....................65

Figure 23: Connection diagram fuel train gas direct ignition (G), 1-stage, with valve proving....................................................................................................................65

Fig. 24: Valve proving with separate pressure switch ...................................................66

Figure 25: LME71.000...: Inputs and outputs/internal connection diagram ...................69

Figure 26: Program sequence PME72.521... for connection diagram fuel trains (G)/Gp1/1) ..............................................................................................................75

Figure 27: Connection diagram fuel train gas direct ignition (G), 1-stage .....................77

Figure 28: Connection diagram fuel train gas direct ignition 1 (Gp1/1), 2-stage ...........77

Figure 29: Connection diagram for LME72.000... with actuator SQM4... (example 1) ..78

Figure 30: Connection diagram for LME73.000... without actuator SQM4... .................79

Figure 31: LME72.000...: Inputs and outputs/internal connection diagram ...................81

Figure 32: Program sequence PME72.541... for connection diagram fuel trains (G)/Gp1/1) ..............................................................................................................84

Figure 33: Connection diagram fuel train gas direct ignition (G), 1-stage .....................86

Page 243: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

243/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 29.11.2011

Figure 34: Connection diagram fuel train gas pilot ignition 1 (Gp1/1), 1-stage .............86

Figure 35: Connection diagram for LME72.000... with actuator SQM4... (example 1) ..87

Figure 36: Connection diagram for LME73.000... without actuator SQM4... .................88

Figure 37: LME72.000...: Inputs and outputs/internal connection diagram ...................90

Figure 38: Program sequence PME73.810... for connection diagram fuel train (G)......93

Figure 39: Connection diagram fuel train gas direct ignition (G), 1-stage .....................95

Figure 40: Connection diagram fuel train gas direct ignition (G), 2-stage .....................95

Figure 41: Connection diagram fuel train gas direct ignition (G), 1-stage, with valve proving....................................................................................................................96

Figure 42: Connection diagram fuel train gas direct ignition (G), 2-stage, with valve proving....................................................................................................................96

Fig. 43: Valve proving with separat pressure switch .....................................................97

Figure 44: Connection diagram for LME73.000... with actuator SQM4... (example 1) ..99

Figure 45: LME73.000...: Inputs and outputs/internal connection diagram .................101

Figure 46: Program sequence PME73.820... for connection diagram fuel train (G)....105

Figure 47: Connection diagram fuel train gas direct ignition (G), 1-stage ...................107

Figure 48: Connection diagram fuel train gas direct ignition 1 (G), 2-stage ................107

Figure 49: Connection diagram fuel train gas direct ignition 1 (G), 1-stage, with valve proving..................................................................................................................108

Figure 50: Connection diagram fuel train gas direct ignition (G), 2-stage, with valve proving..................................................................................................................108

Figure 51: Valve proving with separate pressure switch .............................................109

Figure 52: Connection diagram for LME73.000... with actuator SQM4... (example 1) 111

Figure 53: Connection diagram for LME73.000... without actuator SQM4... ...............112

Figure 54: LM73.000...: Inputs and outputs/internal connection diagram....................114

Figure 55: Program sequence PME73.830... for connection diagram fuel trains (G)/(Gp1/1)/(Gp1/2) ..............................................................................................118

Figure 56: Connection diagram fuel train gas direct ignition (G), 1-stage ...................120

Figure 57: Connection diagram fuel train gas pilot ignition 1 (Gp1/1), 1-stage ...........120

Figure 58: Connection diagram fuel train gas pilot ignition 1 (Gp1/2), 1-stage, with valve proving..................................................................................................................121

Figure 59: Connection diagram fuel train gas direct ignition 1 (Gp1/2), 1-stage, with valve proving ........................................................................................................121

Figure 60: Valve proving with separate pressure switch .............................................122

Figure 61: Connection diagram for LME73.000... with actuator SQM4... (example 1) 124

Figure 62: LM73.000...: Inputs and outputs/internal connection diagram....................126

Fig. 63: Program sequence PME73.831... to connection diagram fuel trains (G)/(Gp1)/(Gp2) ....................................................................................................130

Fig. 64: Program sequence PME73.831... to connection diagram fuel trains (G)/(Gp1)/(Gp2) ....................................................................................................131

Page 244: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

244/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 29.11.2011

Fig. 65: Program sequence PME73.831... to connection diagram fuel trains (G)/(Gp1)/(Gp2) ....................................................................................................132

Fig. 66: Program sequence PME73.831... to connection diagram fuel trains (G)/(Gp1)/(Gp2) ....................................................................................................133

Fig. 67: Connection diagram fuel application gas direct ignition (G), 1-stage, without valve proving ........................................................................................................135

Fig. 68: Connection diagram fuel application gas pilot ignition 2 (Gp2), 1-stage, without valve proving ........................................................................................................135

Fif. 69: Connection diagram fuel application gas pilot ignition 1 (Gp1), 1-stage, with valve proving ........................................................................................................136

Fig 70: Connection diagram fuel application gas direct ignition 1 (G), 1-stage, with valve proving..................................................................................................................136

Fig. 71: Valve proving with separate pressure switch .................................................137

Fig. 72: Connection diagram for LME73.000... with actuator SQM4... (example 2) ....139

Fig. 73: Connection diagram for LME73.000... with actuator SQM4... (example 1) ....140

Fig. 74: LME73.000...: Inputs and outputs/internal connection diagram .....................143

Figure 75: Program sequence PME73.840... to connection diagram fuel trains (G)/(Gp1/1)/(Gp1/2) ..............................................................................................148

Figure 76: Connection diagram fuel train gas direct ignition (G), 1-stage ...................150

Figure 77: Connection diagram fuel train gas pilot ignition 1 (Gp1/1), 1-stage ...........150

Figure 78: Connection diagram fuel train gas pilot ignition 1 (Gp1/2), 1-stage, with valve proving..................................................................................................................151

Figure 79: Connection diagram fuel train gas direct ignition 1 (Gp1/2), 1-stage, with valve proving ........................................................................................................151

Figure 80: Valve proving with separate pressure switch .............................................152

Figure 81: Connection diagram for LME73.000... with actuator SQM4... (example 1) 154

Figure 82: Connection diagram for LME73.000... without actuator SQM4... ...............155

Figure 83: LM73.000...: Inputs and outputs/internal connection diagram....................157

Figure 84: Connection diagram for feedback potentiometer ASZ12.33 ......................163

Figure 85: Connection diagram for load controller ......................................................164

Figure 86: Description of the unit/display and buttons.................................................169

Figure 87: Meaning of display .....................................................................................170

Figure 88: Assignment of levels ..................................................................................175

Figure 89: Info level .....................................................................................................176

Figure 90: Servic level .................................................................................................181

Figure 91: Description of display and buttons .............................................................201

Page 245: LME7… Burner control Basic Documentation

245/245

Building Technologies Division Basic Documentation LME7... CC1P7105en Infrastructure & Cities Sector 29.11.2011

Siemens AG Infrastructure & Cities Sector Building Technologies DivisionBerliner Ring 23 D-76437 Rastatt Tel. +49 7222 598 279 Fax +49 7222 598 269 www.siemens.com

© 2011 Siemens AG Infrastructure & Cities Sector Building Technologies Division

Subject to change!